JP2020065814A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a performance includes notification means capable of notifying a player of information related to the performance and setting means capable of setting a parameter related to the notification by operating operation means. The setting means can set the parameter when a predetermined performance is to be in a specific mode or thereafter.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 71

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine capable of setting an effect parameter for notification related to effect (speaker volume, LED brightness (light amount), etc.) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-77362, A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the setting of the effect parameter is uniform, and different effect parameters are not set according to the situation, and there is room for improvement in the interest of the game.

  It is an object of the present invention to improve the enjoyment of games.

  In a representative form of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing an effect, a parameter relating to the notification can be set by operating an informing means capable of executing an informing related to the effect and an operating means. A setting means is provided, and the setting means can set the parameter when or when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of turning on the power supply of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading big hit judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the fall lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a table which illustrates the sort of jackpot type. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during a special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (first half) during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (half) in fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit termination process. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of received command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of prefetching change type | system | group command processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change production setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production adjustment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a stop symbol setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of accessory operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fanfare production setting processing. It is the time chart which illustrates the appearance of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which are executed in the normal game state. It is a time chart which illustrates the appearance of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed in the time saving state / probability variation state. It is the time chart which shows the production when irregular big hit occurs from the normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram (1) showing a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from the normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram (part 2) showing a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from the normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from waiting for customers in the normal game state. It is another example of the screen transition diagram showing the screen transition when the irregular big hit occurs from waiting for customers in the normal gaming state. It is the time chart which shows the production when irregular big hit occurs from time saving state / probability change state. It is a screen transition diagram (the 1) which shows a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from a time saving state / probability change state. It is a screen transition diagram (the 2) which shows a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from a time saving state / probability change state. It is a screen transition diagram (the 3) which shows a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from a time saving state / probability change state. It is a screen transition diagram which shows a screen transition when an irregular big hit occurs from waiting for a customer in a time saving state / probability change state. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a setting selection screen (menu screen) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume / brightness adjustment screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the volume / brightness adjustment screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 72 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition in the case where notification is performed by the volume / luminance set on the adjustment screen of FIG. 71. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the adjustment screen which can set the parameter regarding the notification by a player corresponding to a predetermined production. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the effect which raises sound volume in steps. FIG. 72 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition in the case where the notification according to the content set on the adjustment screen in FIG. 74A is executed in the second embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

  The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable via a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front surface frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

  Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are provided at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The illumination member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it. Although not shown, the effect button 25 has a built-in vibrating mechanism for vibrating the effect button 25.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  In addition, the production pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the production operating device during non-execution.

  The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probability change state, probability change state, high probability state), big hit state. (Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Furthermore, without determining whether the probability variation state is generated by the big hit symbol random number, the probability variation state may be always generated when the big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that a player operates when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided. The operation handle 24 is equipped with an air vibe mechanism that gives a vibe feeling (vibration feeling) by intermittently blowing air toward the attached player's fingers.

  The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, so that the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage where the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b is moved to the starting winning port 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It's easy to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

  The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right playing area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, an ordinary variable prize device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, provided with a second start winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the universal figure starting gate 34. It is set up. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front side to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which it easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the start winning port 36 facilitates winning of a game ball when left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 facilitates winning of a game ball when right-handed.

  The movable member 37b is a slide open / close type ordinary electric accessory that operates via the universal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure changing display game is a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to the open state (the winning easy state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state generated in, the time saving state (normal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Even in the probability changing state (excluding the latent probability changing state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs redundantly.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, the lower large winning opening is opened by retracting it from the front to the back side by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win when hitting to the right.

  In the game area 32 above the normal variation winning device 37, there is an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper special winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right by the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variation winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the state of closing the special winning opening (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the second special variation winning device 39, it becomes easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. The lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

  A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the jackpot is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. The game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (a specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and if a V winning is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probability change state after the big hit ends. In addition to confirming that it is done, information (a specific area passing command or the like) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

  When a game ball wins the major winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines that the winning opening has won. The number of prize balls according to the type of is discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. In the lower game area 32, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize. Further, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball is won (a board decoration device described later). (A part of 46) is provided.

  Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 30a outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

  The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display device, lamp D2), a fluctuation display unit 53 (general display device, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the universal figure fluctuation display game, and start (hold) of each variable display game A storage display unit for notifying the number of memories (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56) is provided. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D7), a second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) which lights up when the time-saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-saving state, and the probability state of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high probability. Third gaming state display unit 59 (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the state has been reached, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38, 39) The round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D6) for displaying is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or plural It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the public figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighted display and a lighted off display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the variation time of the variation display on the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the universal display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display sections 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED1, special figure 2 holding LED2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot state is not in effect (including the case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

  Next, a flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the number of award balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 via the.

  The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

  The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

  In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit / miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

  The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit in the lighted state as normal identification information (universal figure) and a deviation in the unlit state. By blinking this LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

  When the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special map 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored with a predetermined upper limit.

  At the time of detecting the start prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize winning memory, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure starting prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 holding indicator 54 and the special figure 2 holding indicator 55 for notifying the starting prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning or the second starting memory to the normal variable prize device 37.

  In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( It is carried out by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be set to the execution state independently of each other (simultaneously). When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in the present embodiment), the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result.

  When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 variable display After the end of the small hitting operation relating to the game, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

  Also, in the normal game state, when a game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 by right-handing, the special figure 2 variation display game starts varying, but basically it varies for a long time (long variation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period, it will be forcibly disengaged and stopped.

  Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, and the symbols which are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special pattern (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating the lighting display and the extinguishing display (blinking). fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "extinguishing" in the case of off and "lighting" in the case of big hit or small hit.

  Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in the execution state (execution state) at the same time.

  When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special variation winning device 38, 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). To be converted. That is, the special winning openings provided in the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player has a privilege to obtain many game balls. Granted.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first start winning hole 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure changing display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain more games than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is low. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the small hit state, only the special variation winning device 38 is activated and only the lower special winning opening is opened, but both the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are in the small winning state. It may be configured to operate to open both the lower special winning opening and the upper special winning opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state is a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur in the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, in the small hit rush, the special variation winning device 38 is opened with high frequency. It should be noted that it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the small hit RUSH (rush) state is set even in the time saving state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  The big hit is a special result accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  After the jackpot state, if there is a V winning (passing of the game ball to the specific area 86) during the jackpot state, the state changes to the probability changing state, and if there is no V winning, a game state other than the probability changing state (normal) Game state or time saving state). On the other hand, after completion of the small hit state (shorter time compared to the big hit state), the game state returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. In the big hit state, the big hit probability is low, but in the small hit state, the big hit probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained (the probability state does not change in the small hit). Therefore, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the probability variation state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result), and the big hit probability is throughout the small hit rush state. Is maintained at a high probability (probability change state).

  It should be noted that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a). , 39a) includes a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

  Here, the main variable display game and the sub variable display game in this embodiment will be described. The main variable display game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area (main area, main starting winning opening) where the game ball often enters, and the sub variable display game is executed from the main starting area. Is also executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting area (sub-area, sub-start prize hole) where the game ball rarely enters. The main variable display game and the sub variable display game can be in a running state (both simultaneously) (simultaneous variation is possible).

  In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is a long-term variation (long variation, for example, 10 minutes) as described later, and it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 36. . Therefore, in the normal game state, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) and the sub starting area is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning area). Therefore, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game, and the sub variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, in the normal game state, left striking, which facilitates entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 36, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than right striking.

  In the time saving state, the game control device 100 controls the big hit probability (large hit probability of special figure) to be a low probability, and the ordinary electric power support (electric power support) is executed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37 and the sub starting area is the first starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the sub variation display game is the special variation display game. Figure 1 It becomes a variable display game. Further, in the time-saving state, right-handing is recommended as a mode of launching the game ball.

  In the probability variation state, the game control device 100 controls so as to be in a small hit rush state in which small hits frequently occur. Therefore, in the probability change state, it is recommended that the player hits the normal variation winning device 37 and the special variation winning device 38 to the right as the launching mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the probability variation state, as in the time saving state, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37 and the sub starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, so the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, The subsidiary variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In addition, in the case of a big hit, a normal big hit that a big hit result of the main variation display game (first special result) occurs, and an irregular big hit state that a big hit result of the secondary variation display game (first special result) occurs There is a big hit. In addition, in the small hit, a normal small hit (normal small hit) in which a small hit state occurs due to the small hit result of the main variable display game (second special result) and a small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game (second special result) As a result, there is an irregular small hit that causes a small hit state. In the present embodiment, there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a small hit result only in the special figure 2 variable display game. Therefore, only irregular small hits can occur in the normal gaming state, and time saving is achieved. Only normal small hits can occur in the state and the probability change state.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. And so on.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for informing the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like to make the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game) changeable. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big winning probability or a small winning probability, but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability set value) relating to the game condition. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value changing switch, or a dedicated set value changing switch may be provided exclusively.

  Since the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged in a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

  As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, six levels, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting) 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the probability setting changing process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → Setting value 4 (Setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

  Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value of 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (program, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random number values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

  Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the second half variation group table, the second half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed, and have already been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a non-display mode. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed in the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display, and is determined before the displayed result is derived and displayed. The display state when at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a condition that satisfies the special result mode in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is provided as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected degree is different), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns in special figure variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the current state of the special figure variation display game to have a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the special winning opening switch 43 of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 (lower big winning) Mouth switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), the negative logic signal such as a high level 11V and a low level 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is inputted. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

  Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variation winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

  Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. .

  Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. The first input port 122 which takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

  Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there are restrictions on the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in the game shop. It should be noted that the detection signal of the switch that does not need to be processed, such as the starting port switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is, is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls a game. An error signal indicating that the test firing test apparatus is not available is supplied from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving a signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of a switch which does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a normal variation winning device 37 (a solenoid solenoid) 37c, and to open a first special variation winning device 38 a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b (a larger winning opening). The solenoid 1), the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (the special winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and the first for outputting the opening / closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the universal electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

  To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so that the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic drive method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability setting value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

  Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detecting switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Includes special variable winning devices 38, 39 (special winning openings).

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of discharged balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

  For example, the winning character ratio is during the jackpot state in the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning in the special winning opening (= so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (= the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (= the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time counting means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, light a decorative lamp, and drive the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I / F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a DC voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, and DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. Is configured to.

  Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) and put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off-screen on the public-picture display.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a, for example, causes the special winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 to perform control so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. .

  Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such a condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplicating time shortening state is performed to perform normal power support (electric power support).

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time (general figure variation time) of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game is set to the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (eg 1604 msec). Is.

  Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is greater than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher and higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication opening, the universal communication opening time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Further, it is possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the ON / OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

  First, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

  Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state is shifted to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 6B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

  If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) is entered, and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear) is performed. (Processing) is executed and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

  When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device normally starts is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer measures time using a storage area (RAM area or register, which is not the target of validity determination) which is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, there is a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring a standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether a power failure has occurred by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

  When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0 or not. Yes (A1010). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1010 is “N”), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents when the power was last turned off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

  Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

  Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (result of A1016 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is “Y”), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

  Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are ON (result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. .

  When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), the process of confirming the probability setting in the steps A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation mode), the processing of steps A1041-1044 The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the normal power-on processing (when the power is restored) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

  When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 informs that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for the main abnormality error notification notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of error display of “E1” in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. To (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to stand by, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again, and the power supply is turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

  As described above, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting changing operation (the ON operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

  On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) of the abnormality, which is a main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (error display data of “E1” in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As in the case described above, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process stands by.

  When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is “Y”), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value “1”) (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

  In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (during setting confirmation state) process is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

  After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

  The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

  Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (A1037). When no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “Y”), the processing at the time of power failure of steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

  As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to change the probability setting value in a variable setting state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) or to check the probability setting value. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) continues.

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1038) and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization processing (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

  When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability set value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. For example, the payout rate, the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state), the role ratio, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

  On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a normal power source because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. The processing at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power recovery (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Process shifts to.

  The command for RAM initialization transmitted by the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure restoration transmitted by the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state command (high probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence / absence of time saving state An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

  Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information that is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

  The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) 30 by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command that designates the display content of the screen of the display device 41. The command for designating the screen is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing (when it is neither changing nor hitting) for special figures 1 and 2, and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

  After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, the bit transposed pattern of the hard random number (here, the big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of random hit number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random initial value random number) , The initial value of the random number of falling lottery used in the falling lottery (falling random number of initial value of falling lottery, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, hit random number, and falling lottery random number are timer interrupts that are the processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the process.

  In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random number, hit symbol random number, falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as a character ratio and a ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

  When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing / confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

  When neither the probability setting is being changed nor the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. Output processing for performing drive control of the actuator is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring A winning opening switch / state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1317 and thereafter are executed.

  When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs a start opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning opening at the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a. It is executed (A1312). Next, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1315). A segment LED edit process for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1316).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1318).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud caused by vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning opening switches 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), special area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), remaining ball discharging opening in the special variation winning devices 38, 39. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. The game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switches 43 of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

  When the probability setting value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. To the driver via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

  Here, the probability set value display data is the display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people related to the hall, if the probability setting values are different and the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing / confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

  The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

  When it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends.

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. +1 is updated, and the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) that stores the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

  In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the work set value. However, the work set value of the RAM 111c is updated. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and the setting for work is set. A value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used in the game control, the effect control, etc. (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) (Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Display example on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type when the dot Dp is included) display, but each digit of the performance display device 152 is composed of 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, and It consists of f, g and Dp.

  In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, digit 1 to digit 3 is lit to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in correspondence with the work setting values 0 to 5 which are switched each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated while changing the probability setting, at the digit 0, the display probability setting value becomes, for example, “1” to “6”. The display is switched to light up.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0 is set. Turns off. In addition, in the digits 1 to 3, the display of “SET” indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

  In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is “Y”), or when the power is turned off and restarted during the probability setting change (before the setting change is completed). (The result of A1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" at the time of game stop is lit and displayed at digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table that monitors winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and acquires a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start mouth prize to the first start prize hole 36 (A2703). If there is no starting mouth winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the normal game state when there is a starting opening winning combination into the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”) (A2704). It is a special figure low probability & no time saving (in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is low and there is no time saving (state without universal communication support)). If both process numbers are 2 or less, it can be determined that the normal gaming state. If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress. Then, in the normal game state (result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2707.

  The game control device 100, when the probability of big hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (in the high probability state) or in the state of shortening the time period (the state with universal communication support) (the result of A2704 is “N”), A right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 causes the display device 41 to display a right-handed hit instruction display as a warning when the start-win prize is given to the first start-winning prize opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 (the second starting winning opening, a starting opening 2) (A2709), and a hard random number as a big hit random number. A hard random number acquisition process for acquiring is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting mouth prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation) when there is a start mouth winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (result of A2711 is “Y”). A determination is made (A2712). If the normal variation winning device 37 is not in operation (result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not an irregularity (general power cord fraud) for the regular variation winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). If the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that the universal communication fraud is occurring. When the irregularity for the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  The game control device 100, when the fraud for the normal variable winning device 37 is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), sets a table for setting the information on hold by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2). Preparation (A2714), special figure starting port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and starting port switch monitoring processing ends.

  When the fraud against the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713 but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Special processing for common opening switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

  The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure reservation number (starting storage number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, a big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a falling lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high-probability state with a special jackpot probability to a low-probability state (A2912) and stores the falling lottery random number. Save in the area (A2913).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A2914). When it is not a prize for the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is “N”), the processing shifts to step A2917. On the other hand, when it is a winning to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2914 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2915), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as an effect command (A2919), and an effect command setting process (A2920) is executed to make the special figure starter switch common. The process ends. The decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command for the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command for the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at an upper limit is formed. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game balls into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure starting port switch common process will be described. FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and the second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (prefetch process, predetermination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 starting memories generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). When the big hit is in progress (result of A3001 is “Y”), the special figure reservation information determination process ends. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is a winning (A3002). When the winning is to the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is “Y”), that is, when the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step A3004 and subsequent steps.

  If the game control device 100 is not a winning of the starting mouth 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"), is the probability of a big hit being a low probability state and a state without time saving (a state without general electric power support)? It is determined whether or not it is in the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A3003). When the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, if the winning is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2), the special figure hold information determination process is ended without executing the prefetch process (preliminary determination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game often changes for a long time (long change) and is often forced to end with a deviation result, so a prefetch process (preliminary determination process) is performed so as not to be wasted. Do not run.

  When the special control low probability & time saving is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), that is, the game control device 100 is a normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2 in a state other than the normal game state (time saving state or probability variation state)). ), The process proceeds to step A3004 and subsequent steps in order to execute the prefetching process (preliminary determination process).

  Then, the game control device 100 starts the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) and determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3004). . When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A3004 is “Y”), it is determined whether the random number of the falling lottery prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the falling win (A3005), and the look-ahead falling lottery corresponding to the judgment result. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and effect command setting processing is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing pre-reading big hit determination in the low-probability state (A3008). When there is no special figure high probability (the result of A3004 is “N”), there is no fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state in the first place, so the step without performing (A3005-A3007) prefetch processing regarding the fall is performed. The processing moves to A3008.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a pre-reading big hit judging process described later based on the big hit random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and judges whether the judgment result of the pre-reading big hit judging process is a big hit (A3010). ). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

  When the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is out of order (result of A3010 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2). (A3013). In the case of the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “Y”), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the winning in the starting opening 2, so the pre-reading regarding the small hit is made. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and it is determined whether the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3017) and the process proceeds to step A3019.

  The game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the outlier because the small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game when the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “N”) (A3018). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stopped stop pattern information is set. If the determination result is not a small hit due to winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3015 is "N"), that is, if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3018). Then, the process proceeds to step A3019.

  After steps A3012, A3017, A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a low-probability read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting mouth switch and stop symbol information is prepared as a production command (A3020), and production command setting processing is executed (A3021).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing prefetch big hit determination in the high-probability state (A3022), and executes the processes of A3023-A3032 similarly to A3009-A3018. First, a pre-reading big hit determination process described later is executed (A3023), and it is determined whether the result of the pre-reading big hit judging process is a big hit (A3024). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

  When the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is out of order (result of A3024 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2). (A3027). In the case of the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “Y”), the small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the winning in the starting opening 2. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and it is determined whether the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3031) and the process proceeds to step A3033.

  When the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the outlier because the small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game (A3032). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stopped stop pattern information is set. Further, when the determination result is not a small hit by the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3029 is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the deviation stop symbol information is set. (A3032). Then, the process proceeds to step A3033.

  After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (A3033). When it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A3033 is “Y”), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A3033 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3035 without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting mouth switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3035), and executes production command setting processing ( A3036).

  Subsequently, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3037), and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as prefetching. (A3038). Then, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), effect command setting processing is executed (A3040), and the special figure hold information determination processing is performed. finish.

  The effect control device 300 receives both the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the read-ahead stop symbol command ( Pre-reading symbol system command processing (low probability) is executed by using the pre-reading symbol type command processing (high probability) if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is high probability state. (FIG. 51) may be performed.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the pre-reading big hit determination processing (A3009, A3023) in the special figure reservation information determination processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading big hit determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3101), and judges whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the big hit) as a judgment result (A3107), and performs the pre-reading big hit judgment process. finish.

  When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (result of A3102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3103). If the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (result of A3103 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (the low probability determination flag) (the result of A3103 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3106). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the pre-reading big hit determination process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

  If the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). Special figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3202 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played with the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, a specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3205). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the large hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is "Y"), the process of steps A3203 and A3204 is not performed, but the process of step A3205 is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). When the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

  When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 assigns the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3209).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the variation start and effect of the special figure 1 variable display game. Alternatively, the special figure 1 normal process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3210). Note that details of the special process 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process. The special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A3209, and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, The special figure 1 displaying process is executed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing (A3212). The details of the processing during display of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3214).

  When the game process number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, setting of information necessary for performing a big hit ending process, and the like. The mouth remaining ball processing is executed (A3215).

  When the game process number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets information required for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) and executing the special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which performs the setting etc. is executed (A3216). The details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control process relating to the container 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the processing of steps A3202 to A3216. Without performing, after preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of special figure 1 indicator 51 (A3217), it executes the symbol fluctuation control processing which relates to special figure 1 indicator 51 (A3218) , Lever solenoid control processing for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game processing ends. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (A3301). When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is not in progress (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played with the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

  If the special display 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

  When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the special control 2 game processing timer has timed out or has already timed up, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3306 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, and therefore steps A3306 to A3308 are performed. The timer value for long fluctuation is repeatedly counted by the above process for the number of times of repetition to prepare a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 variable display game.

  The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3306 is “Y”). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3311).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets effect. Alternatively, the special figure 2 normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process. The special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3313). The details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

  When the game process number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is executed (A3314). The details of the processing during display of special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the jackpot round is the final round, The process for opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3316).

  When the game process number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a process of setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth remaining ball processing is executed (A3317).

  When the game process number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary to execute the special figure 2 normal process ( A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

  When the game process number is “7” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the process during the small hit. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3319). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

  When the game process number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting process of setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hitting process is executed (A3320).

  When the game process number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary to set the ending time and the special figure 2 small hit end process. A hit remaining ball process is executed (A3321).

  When the game process number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting the information necessary to execute the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure 2 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control process relating to the container 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 1.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401). In addition, here, from the end of the fluctuation of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (during the processing during the display of special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (the special figure 2 big hit end processing), the special figure 2 From the end of the variation of the small hit of the variable display game (during the process of displaying special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the special process of ending the small figure 2) In the middle), the fluctuation display game of Toku-zu 1 cannot start fluctuation.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3402). If a left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (result of A3402 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3406.

  If the left-handing instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handing instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and effect command setting processing. Is executed (A3404), and the left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handing instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A3405).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406). Special Figure 1 If the number of holding is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"), prepare the variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or time saving state as a production command. (A3407), the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). Then, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3411).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3412), and executes production command setting processing. Yes (A3413). The effect control device 300, which has received the remaining game number command, can grasp the number of times of time shortening variation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

  When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3406 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the normal game state (A3416). If it is in the normal gaming state (result of A3416 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3417). If the customer waiting demo has not started (result of A3417 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3418).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3419) and executes an effect command setting process (A3420). In this way, in the normal game state, when the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not being executed and the special figure 1 hold number is 0, the production control device that has received the customer waiting demo command The 300 can execute a customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie on the display device 41. Then, the special processing number 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special processing operation number 1 game processing number (A3421), and the special processing operation number area of the RWM is saved (A3422).

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501). When the special display 2 variable display game cannot start changing (when it cannot start changing) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special processing 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special processing 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). In addition, here, from the end of the fluctuation of the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (during processing during the display of special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 1 big hit), and During the small hit state and execution (during change) of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), prepares the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state as a production command. (A3503), effect command setting processing is executed (A3504). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3505).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as an effect command (A3506), and executes effect command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes production command setting processing. (A3509). The effect control device 300, which has received the remaining game number command, can grasp the number of times of time shortening variation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). In the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 2 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability or during a shortening of time, that is, whether the probability variation state or the shortening of time (A3512). When it is during the high probability of special map or during shortening of time (result of A3512 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3513). If the customer waiting demo has not started (result of A3513 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3514).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3515), and executes an effect command setting process (A3516). In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not being executed in the probability changing state or the time saving state and the special figure 2 hold number is 0, the effect of receiving the customer waiting demo command The control device 300 can execute a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal process number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game process number (A3517), and the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM is saved (A3518).

  On the other hand, when the special map high probability is not being reached or the time is not shortening (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number without preparing the customer waiting demo command. Is set (A3517) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3518). Further, even when the customer waiting demo has been started (the result of A3513 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo command is not prepared, and the special processing 2 game processing number “0” of special processing 2 normal processing is set. Is set (A3517) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3518).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, the falling lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, and sets the big hit flag 1 (A3605a), the special figure. Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) relating to setting of 1 stop symbol (symbol information), special figure 1 information setting which sets special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game The processing (A3607a) is executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3609a) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, the time-reduced variation count updating process for updating the time-reduction variation count is executed (A3611a).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the process number in order to shift to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 (A3612a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A3613a). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal (variable ON signal of the special symbol 1 changing signal) relating to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special display 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-illuminated symbol) is saved in (A3618a).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A3619a). If the special map low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special game mode flag area, the probability of a big hit is a low probability state and there is no time saving (no normal power support). It can be judged that the figure is low and there is no time saving. If there is no special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (the result of A3619a is "Y"), whether the special figure 2 is big jackpot fluctuation, that is, irregular big jackpot (mentioned above) It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is changing (A3620a).

  When the special figure 2 is in the big hit variation (the result of A3620a is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining variation time of the changing special figure 2 variation display game is within a predetermined time. The determination is made (A3621a). Here, for a predetermined time, before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) related to the special figure 1 variable display game is changed to another effect (for example, N reach effect or no reach effect). It is preferable that the time is secured for replacement or suspension and is longer than the longest fluctuation time (for example, 196 seconds) of the special figure 1 variable display game. For example, while the fluctuation time in the normal game state of the special figure 2 variable display game is 590 seconds (about 10 minutes), the predetermined time is about 200 seconds (about 3 minutes).

  When the remaining variation time of the changing special figure 2 variation display game is within a predetermined time (the result of A3621a is “Y”), the game control device 100 suggests the occurrence of an irregular jackpot and adjusts the effect. The irregular big hit production adjustment flag indicating that is necessary is set (A3622a). The irregular big hit effect adjustment flag is cleared by the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (A5428) or the like at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a production adjustment command for adjusting the production as a production command (A3623a), executes production command setting processing (A3624a), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. The effect adjustment command (predetermined information) also has a function of notifying the effect control device 300 of the occurrence of an irregular big hit.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (the result of A3619a is “N”), and the special figure 2 is not in the big hit fluctuation (the result of A3620a is “N”). ), If the remaining variation time of the changing special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the predetermined time (result of A3621a is “N”), the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated without preparing an effect adjustment command. .

  In this way, in the normal game state, when the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot is within a predetermined time, the special figure 1 variable display game is played until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. Every time the game is started (at the start of each special map 1 variable display game), a production adjustment command for adjusting the production is transmitted to the production control device 300. That is, while the irregular big hit effect adjustment flag is set (while being turned on), an effect adjustment command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 every time the special figure 1 variable display game is started. When the effect control device 300 receives the effect adjustment command, the player will not be surprised even if the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged due to the irregular big hit and stopped as a result (a result other than the big hit). You can adjust the content of the performance. In addition, after the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is within a predetermined time, the effect adjustment command is issued only once when the special figure 1 variable display game is first started. The effect control device 300 may adjust the content of the effect based on the effect adjustment command received only once.

  In the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation (for example, 10 minutes), and if the effect adjustment command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to adjust the contents of the effect, the player will not be able to play the game. It is possible that the regular jackpot is recognized immediately after the long-time special figure 2 variable display game is started, the interest of the game is deteriorated, and the player may stop the launch of the game ball by the operation handle 24. However, in the present embodiment, the effect adjustment command is not transmitted until the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is an irregular jackpot, reaches a predetermined time, so that the player is greatly aware of the irregular jackpot. It is possible to prevent the game from being slowed down and the interest in the game being lowered. As the predetermined time is shortened, the player recognizes the irregular big hit just before the big hit stop symbol is stopped.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start process, in step A3601b-A3618b, changes the "big hit flag 1" to "big hit flag 2" and "special figure 1" to "special figure 2" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18). This is replaced and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process is performed, and thus the detailed description is omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, respectively.

  Next to step A3618b, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability or during the time saving, that is, whether the probability variation state or the time saving state (A3619b). If the special map high probability & time saving flag is set in the special map game mode flag area, it can be determined that the probability change state (high probability state) is set, and if the special map low probability & time saving flag is set, It can be determined that the time is short. If there is a high probability of special figure or during short-time reduction (probability change state or short-time state) (result of A3619b is “Y”), whether or not the special figure 1 is changing during the big hit, that is, irregular big hit (described above). It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is as follows (A3620a).

  When the special figure 1 is in the big hit variation (the result of A3620b is “Y”), the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the occurrence of the irregular big hit and produces a production adjustment command for adjusting the production. It prepares as a command (A3621b), executes the effect command setting process (A3622b), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. The effect adjustment command of step A3621b is the same as that of step A3623a. When the special map 1 is in a big hit variation, the big hit flag 1 is also used as the irregular big hit production adjustment flag. In the present embodiment, the irregular big hit production adjustment flag is not set for simplification, but it is set. You may

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 is not during the special figure high probability or during the time saving (probably changing state or time saving state) (the result of A3619b is "N"), and when the special figure 1 is not in the big hit fluctuation (the result of A3620b is " N ”), the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated without preparing an effect adjustment command.

  Thus, every time the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot in the probability variation state or the time saving state (at the time of starting each special figure 2 variable display game, ), The production adjustment command for adjusting the production is transmitted to the production control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the effect adjustment command, the player will not be surprised even if the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly disengaged due to the irregular big hit and stopped as a result (a result other than the big hit). You can adjust the content of the performance. After the start of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot, the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 only once when the special figure 2 variable display game is started for the first time. The device 300 may adjust the content of the effect based on the effect adjustment command received only once.

[Falling lottery processing]
Next, the details of the falling lottery process (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high-probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (A3701). When it is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process is ended.

  When the special map high probability is in effect (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 has the value of the falling lottery random number of the target (special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). When it is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “Y”), the falling lottery process is ended. When it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “Y”), the falling lottery process is ended.

  If the game control device 100 is equal to or lower than the falling lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is “N”), the value of the target falling lottery random number becomes a value between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value. Therefore, the processing at the time of winning the falling lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high-probability end are the jackpot 2 signals of off-data (off signal) and the jackpot 4 signals of off-data (off signal). As a result, a signal relating to the high probability end is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (hall computer or the like).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability and shortening of time in the test signal output data area (A3705). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation This is off data of the time reduction state signal.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process is terminated. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

  As described above, in the probability variation state (with a high probability of special map), the falling lottery is executed at the start of each special map variation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probability variation state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low probability). Falling processing (A3704-A3708) of falling to the stochastic state is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3802). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Then, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), the big hit determination process of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3805). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved at step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. .

  When the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is “Y”), or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a big hit. The flag 1 setting process ends.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

  The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the deviation information in the large hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3903). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). When the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is “N”), the big hit determination process of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3906). ), It is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3907). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3907 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved at step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that it is possible to prevent the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 from being big hits at the same time. .

  If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), the game control device 100 obtains it. Based on the big hit random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit ( A3910). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). When the special display 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3901 (A3911), The jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. When the special display 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as a judgment result (A4007), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not there is a special figure high probability (A4003). If the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability of special figure (the result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

  After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is common to the small hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hitting judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hitting lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hitting judgment value, and is the upper limit of the small hitting judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined that a small hit.

  Of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap the value range (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit. However, a unique small hit random number may be provided.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4103) and ends the small hit determination process. .

  When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “N”), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-described large hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24) and falling lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the falling probability of.

  In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (high probability state) is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state (low-probability state) tends to increase as the probability setting value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely it is that a big jackpot will occur. Be advantageous. As described above, only one of the big hit probability in the low-probability state and the big hit probability in the high-probability state may be configured to be high as the probability setting value becomes large. The big hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 23 by the range of the value of the big hit random number. The big hit probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in accordance with the probability setting value, in addition to the upper limit judgment value.

  Further, in setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probability may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

  In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, or regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 24 by the range of the value of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 variable display game (the small hit probability is zero). It is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In the example of FIG. 25C, the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), whether it is the high probability state or the low probability state, and the special figure It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a 1-variable display game or a special figure 2 variable-display game. The falling probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value of FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the falling lottery random number.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4201). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4203), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4204). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process, which will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning opening information area of the RWM (A4209). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212.

  After the steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4213). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether or not big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4301). When the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4303), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 2 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4304). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process, which will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4308), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4309). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4311). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (A4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

  After the steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4318). The decoration special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4320). ), The special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A4321). After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing ends.

  In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game on the basis of the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table exemplifying the distribution of the types of big hits (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figure 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process described above. Is. The sort of jackpot type is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

  FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the type of jackpot and its distribution rate corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of big hits are 10R probability big hits, 4R certainty big hits, and 10R normal big hits (100 time saving times), which are common to the special figure 1 and 2 variable display games. In addition, a 10R normal jackpot (0 times for saving time) may be provided.

  In addition, the distribution ratios of the 10R probability variation big hit, the 4R probability variation big hit, and the 10R normal variation big hit (100 times of shortening time) are 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game The difference is 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

  Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second half variation. The first-half variation is the variation mode before the start of the reach, and the second-half variation is the variation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half variation according to the special figure 1 reserved number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the process of step A4404 and updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402. Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) to the RWM variable distribution information. The information is saved in the information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game). It is determined whether or not it is "in state" (A4501). When the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (result of A4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4505.

  If the special control low probability & time saving is not in progress (the result of A4501 is "N"), that is, if the game control apparatus 100 is in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the special figure variation display game to be started is the time reduction final. It is determined whether there is fluctuation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. If the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the final time variation variation (result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

  When the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time reduction final variation (result of A4502 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuation, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuation. .

  On the other hand, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the winning lottery (FIG. 20) is won and the probability change state (high-probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low-probability state).

  The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “Y”), or when it is a time reduction final variation (result of A4502 is “Y”). )), In order to secure a time for notifying that it is the final fluctuation, the first half offset data and the latter half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511.

  If the special figure variation display game to be started is not the high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (( A4507). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4507 is "N"), the first half offset data for the off / small hit of the special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4508), and the process of step A4510 Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for big hit of the special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes longer (longer variation) than the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In the probability change state (high probability state of special figure), since the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game does not normally change (long change). Short fluctuation compared to). As a result, in the probability change state (special figure high probability state), a small hit rush state occurs in which small hits frequently occur in the special figure 2 variable display game. Since the probability state does not change in the small hit, the small hit rush state in which small hits frequently occur continues from the start of the probability changing state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that enables a small hit rush state even in a time saving state.

  After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

  The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group address table (A4601a), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares it (A4602a), and the fluctuation pattern random number of special figure 1 The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) and prepared (A4603a).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604a). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (the result of A4604a is “Y”), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte sorting process and the sorting process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The structure of the second-half variable group table is different for hitting and deviating, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for hitting and a 2-byte size for deviating. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special display 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

  After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). . Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611a), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612a). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

  By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

  The special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (FIG. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

  By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the used fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special map 1 (A5001).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5005).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Then, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5008 is “N”), information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game It is determined whether or not to start (A5009).

  When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (result of A5009 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010), When the long fluctuation of the 2-variation display game is started (result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient for the 2-byte timer is varied, so the predetermined number of repetitions (9 here) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to the area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

  For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of times of repeating 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, the special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game process (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the long variation timer is added to the game process timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, it is possible to set the long fluctuation time of the special fluctuation 2 fluctuation display game of 60,000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

  The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

  When the information regarding the special display 1 variable display game is being set (result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times of repetition of the timer.

  After the steps A5008, A5010, A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012) and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). . Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) of the target special figure variation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure variation. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

  By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the starting storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining a fluctuation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, details of the time shortening variation number update processing (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time shortening variation count updating process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (during the probability change state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A5101 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

  When the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the special figure time saving (time saving state) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the time saving flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time saving flag), it can be determined that the special time saving is in progress. If the special figure is not in the time saving mode (the result of A5102 is “N”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

  The game control device 100 updates the number of time shortening fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1 when the special map is in a short time (with a low probability of special map and support for normal power is available) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). The initial value of the number of times of time shortening variation is the number of variations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times (big hit end setting process 2 described later). In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts changing, the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of times of time reduction variation is 0 (A5104). When the number of time shortening fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is, when the time saving state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 updates the number of time shortening fluctuations. The process ends. When the number of time shortening fluctuations is 0 (result of A5104 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving end in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal related to the end of the time saving is the off-data of two big hit signals. As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signal relating to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, or a normal electric role This is the off data of the object 1 open extension state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108). , The universal figure time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (A5109), and the time shortening variation count updating process ends.

  In this way, by executing the time shortening variation number updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (special figure low probability and normal state with special figure low probability and normal electric power support) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (state with low special figure probability and normal electric power support). It is possible to shift to the state without power support).

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

  The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301). The number of times of symbol determination output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure variable display game is determined to the external device. To be done. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5305).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the out-of-order symbol of special figure 1, and 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of special figure 1.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

  If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). Or not (A5308). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5308 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5319. If the Toku-zu 2 is also changing (result of A5308 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 2 displaying process is being executed (A5309).

  When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5311. When the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5309 is “N”), the symbol determination number output count is updated by +1 (A5310). Next, as the display time of the special figure 2, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311), and is displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3304), and therefore is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made equal. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the off-design command of the decoration special drawing 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (A5314), and executes production command setting processing ( A5315). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 2, a process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game at the result of a deviation is executed.

  By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game will be lost. As a result, the fluctuation will be forced to end (forced end).

  The special figure 1 changing process is at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is up (A3206). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly changed (forced end).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320). The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5321). Then, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 1 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 game process number area is saved, the process number "2" is saved, the process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, etc. Perform the processing required to shift to processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game hits, the special figure 2 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forcibly terminated by the result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

  The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device. . Next, the decoration special drawing 2 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5405).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviating symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if the big hit symbol of special symbol 2, and 136 msec if the small hit symbol of special symbol 2. is there. It should be noted that the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved on the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of A5407 is "N"), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed). Is determined (A5408). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (result of A5408 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is "N"), that is, when the result is a small hit, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game interruption flag (A5412). The decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Then, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is running (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be changed to the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) has been postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the end of the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game The floating display game can be restarted.

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 displaying process described later is being executed ( A5410). When the processing during the display of special figure 1 is being executed (result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the symbol decision count output count is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5415), and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3205), so that it is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the off-design command of the decoration special drawing 1 as a production command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (A5418), and executes production command setting processing ( A5419). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 2, a process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game at the disengagement result is executed.

  By the processes of steps A5415 to A5422, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 1 displaying process (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced with a disengagement result. It will be changed to end (execution end).

  The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer has repeated 0 times and the special figure 2 game processing timer is up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special figure 2 variable display game in which the hit result changes.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 2 upper limit number of rounds information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5425).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). Then, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 for making settings to execute the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, the special figure 2 game process number area is saved, the process number "2" is saved, and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Perform the processing required to shift to processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forcibly terminated by the result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during display of special figure 1.

  The game control device 100 first loads the big hit flag 1 (which indicates big hit information or deviance information) from the big hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the big hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, based on the big hit flag 1, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A5703).

  When the result of the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the Toku-zu 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the signal per special symbol 1.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes an effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the big hit fanfare command is prepared as a performance command (A5707), and performance command setting processing is executed (A5708).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5709). The signal here includes two big hits of ON data (ON signal) and three big hits of ON data (ON signal). In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5710), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number in order to shift to the process in the fanfare / interval (A5712) and saves the process number in the game process number area of special figure 1 (A5713). / Processing setting process during interval is executed (A5714), and the process during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

  In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as the signal for starting the big hit, one big hit signal of ON data (ON signal) and four big hit signals of ON data (ON signal) are saved in the external information output data area. Also, a signal relating to the end of high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time-reduction variation number area that holds the time-reduction variation number is cleared. In addition, the round number area is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is “N”), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the falling lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the time shortening final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is the final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. If it is not the final time-shortening change (result of A5716 is “N”), the process moves to step A5724.

  The game control device 100, when the high probability final fluctuation (result of A5715 is “Y”) or the time shortening final fluctuation (result of A5716 is “Y”), the probability information command (low) (Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5718). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5721). If the special display 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5721 is “Y”), the process moves to step A5724.

  When the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5721 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Then, in order to turn off the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for informing that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5723). , Clearing the change of special map 1 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 1 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is displayed. The processing number is saved (A5725). Then, the process of displaying the special map 1 ends.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half of the processing during display of special figure 2, and FIG. 38B shows the second half of the processing during display of special figure 2.

  The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801) and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Then, the big hit flag 2 (which shows big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes an effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, the big hit fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5809), and production command setting processing is executed (A5810).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes ON data of two big hit signals and ON data of three big hits. In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5812), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / during-interval process (A5814).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5815), executes the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process (A5816), and ends the special figure 2 displaying process. . The fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing is the same as the processing executed in the special figure 1 displaying processing.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) is determined (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5818). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5818 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time-reduction final variation (A5819). If it is not the final time shortening variation (result of A5819 is “N”), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5824.

  The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5818 is “Y”) or is a time shortening final variation (result of A5819 is “Y”). )), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5821).

  Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5823). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826) and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8-, which saves the signal related to the right-handing instruction (on data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A5828) and notifies that it is right-handed In order to turn on D10), the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

  Next, in this embodiment, the game control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area because the lower large winning opening is opened with a small hit (A5830), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area The illegality monitoring period outside flag is saved (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 may not be changed.

  In the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare processing, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. Also, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit) is saved in the external information output data area. Furthermore, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit midway information is saved in the special figure status area.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5833). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5833 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time-reduction final variation (A5834). If it is not the final time shortening variation (result of A5834 is “N”), the process of steps A5835 to A5839 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step A5840.

  The gaming control device 100, if it is a high-probability final change (result of A5833 is “Y”), or if it is a time-shortening final change (result of A5834 is “Y”), probability information command (low probability). Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 turns off the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for notifying that it is right-handed, and in the game state display number 2 area, the number in the left-handed state. Is saved (A5839), and the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 2 normal process to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is displayed. The processing number is saved (A5841). Then, the special figure 2 displaying process is ended.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is “N”), the process moves to step A6010.

  When it is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball has not passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. That is, until the game ball is passed to the universal figure starting gate 34 after the right hitting is started, the process related to the big hit (the process during the opening of the special winning opening) is not performed.

  The game control device 100 sets the information on the start of the big hit when the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is “Y”), that is, when the right hit is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, the round number upper limit value table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and the round number upper limit value area of the RWM is obtained. Save to (A6005). In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit values of the number of rounds are 10R and 4R.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper special winning opening is opened in the big hit, the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the fraud monitoring outside flag is set in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM. Is saved (A6008), and the ON output data of the accessory continuous actuating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6010). The number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process, and thus is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time. After that, a special command opening command and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a big winning medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big winning medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value may be not 0 but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific region 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In this embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is a big hit round 1 (first big hit round).

  In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the lever solenoid is opened so as to open the specific region 86 in a long time in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or 4R probability variation big hit) and in a short time (the very short time) in the case of the normal big hit (10R normal big hit). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “N”), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "4" as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening opening process (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A6020). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y"), this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6021), and the special winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game process. Save in the timer area (A6022). Special figure 1 If it is not a big hit in the variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to area (A6024).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the special winning opening solenoid of RWM. In the data area, the special winning opening on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b (big winning opening solenoid 2) is saved (A6026), the special winning opening count is cleared (A6027), and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. To finish.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening, but there may be provided two types of big hits that open only the upper special winning opening and big hits that open only the lower special winning opening, It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower winning holes.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

  The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction judgment data is data without time saving, after the big hit ends, the big hit end setting process 1 is executed to shift to the normal game state (A6102), and when the time reduction judgment data is data with time saving, the big hit After the end, big hit end setting processing 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state (A6103).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or 4R probability variation big hit), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. It almost certainly detects the passage of the game ball to V 86 (V winning) (specific region regular passage). When the detection signal from the specific area switch 72 is received, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 86 (V winning) in the RAM. is there.

  Even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of the normal jackpot (10R regular jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 causes an accidental game ball to reach the specific area 86 (V winning opening). It may be possible to detect passage (V prize) (specific area irregular passage). In this case as well, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

  When there is no specific area passage information (result of A6104 is “N”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 3 is executed to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the big hit ends (A6105). In this case, the data set in the big hit end setting process 3 is overwritten on the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2, and the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2 becomes invalid. Become.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence / absence of a low-probability or high-probability stochastic state or a time saving state is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area.

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a specific area irregular passage (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) is that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) In the case of the probability variation big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. In addition to the regular passage of the specific region, even when the irregular passage of the specific region occurs, the state changes to the probability variation state (probability variation state) after the big hit ends.

  When there is a specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “Y”), the game control device 100 adds the irregular probability variation information to the loaded probability information command and includes it (A6108), and the probability information A performance command setting process is executed to set the command as a performance command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “N”), effect command setting processing is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as it is as an effect command (A6109).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A6110), and saves the process number in the game process number area of the special figure 1 (A6111). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the big hit here are the off data of one big hit signal and the off data of three big hit signals.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signal regarding the end of the big hit here, for example, OFF data of the condition device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, OFF data of the special symbol 1 signal, OFF data of the special symbol 2 signal Is.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A6115), and the special figure status region is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

  This special figure 2 game wait time value is used for the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has been forcibly ended (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to delay sometimes. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

  If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game processing (immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 big hit end processing is executed ( In (A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game has started (started within the timer interrupt processing this time), the special figure 2 variable display game is better than the special figure 1 variable display game. It will start first and may be a problem. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit ending process, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

  The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game Of the fluctuation start (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the jackpot state ends in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

  After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A6717 is omitted, and FIG. 2 The game wait time value does not have to be set.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

  Steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit ending process are the ones in which "special figure 1" in steps A6101 to A6116 of the special figure 1 big hit ending process are replaced with "special figure 2", respectively. Since the same processing as the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end processing. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

  The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is the off-data of the two big hit signals. The signal related to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signal regarding the start without a time saving state is off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the off-data of the time shortening state signal, the off-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off-data of the normal electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303) and saves the universal figure without speed saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (A6304), and causes the special figure game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6305). The general / universal work time saving flag indicates that the general / universal work variation display game is not in a time-reducing variable state (time-saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and not in a time saving state (universal power support state).

  After that, the game control device 100 clears the time shortening variation number area to 0 (A6306), and saves a signal regarding a left-handed instruction (for example, off data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6307). . Then, in order to turn off the indicator LED (first game state display portion 57) during right hitting, save the number in left hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and in the transmission command area upon power failure restoration The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

  The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit starts (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time saving state (with time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, on data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the on-data of the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the flag indicating that there is a time saving state in the universal figure game mode flag area (A6504), The special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6505). The general / universal working hour reduction flag indicates that the general / universal figure variation display game is in a time-reducing variable state (time-saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and is in a time saving state (universal power support state).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation number area that stores the time reduction variation number (A6506), and indicates the probability of being in the time reduction state in the power failure recovery transmission command area. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 ends.

  Since the right hitting state is advantageous in that the right hitting is advantageous from the big hitting state, the right hitting setting process is not performed in the big hitting end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3.

  The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit starts (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON data, special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal ON data, special symbol 2 is ON data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and is in a short time state (here, a time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to a right-handing instruction (for example, ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to turn on the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) in the right-handed state, save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6806), and in the transmission command area at power failure recovery The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the big hit end setting process 3 is ended.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a command for opening a small hit of the lower big winning opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6905).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal (ON data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) related to the start of the small hit operation in the test signal output data area (A6906), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower big prize winning on data (A6907). As a result, in the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened.

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening count number area in which the count number (detection count) of the special winning opening count switch (the lower special winning opening switch 38a and / or the upper special winning opening switch 39a) is stored. (A6908), the small hit fanfare processing is completed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning opening pattern only opens the big winning opening only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hitting medium processing after the small hitting fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

  The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal about the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Yes (A7304). Further, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without universal communication support), that is, low probability of special map & no time saving (normal) It is determined whether or not it is in the gaming state (A7307). If it is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (result of A7307 is "N"), the process of step A7310 and thereafter is executed.

  The game control device 100 outputs a signal (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) related to a left-handed instruction when the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (the result of A7307 is "Y"). It is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended ( A7310).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A7310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311) and executes an effect command setting process. Yes (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Then, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A7310 is “N”), the Toku-zu 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decorative Toku-zu 1 restart command, and the Toku-zu 2 End the small hit end process

  For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Then, production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a fixed period of time, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  After that, the production control device 300 executes the RTC reading process of reading the time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 as the time counting means (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the effect control device 300 is powered on (that is, the game machine 10 is powered on) (for example, by changing the position of the RTC reading process, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC338 to perform various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time with the probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn so that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period of executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to which the production points are added are processed, and at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. Note that the player can estimate the set value from the added value by lottery the value to be added to the effect points (added value) with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number updating process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), for example. . The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

  The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

  In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect for driving a motor is set.

  And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

  And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), The processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the command received is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

  Next, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 49. Further, the address of the analysis command area is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are executed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 48) described above will be described next with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the production control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

  When the MODE part does not represent the variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (fanfare screen, round screen display, etc.) related to the effect during the hit, and includes, for example, a big hit fanfare command (set in special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare / Set during interval processing), Interval command (set during big winning opening processing), Ending command (set during big winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), It is a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) or the like. If the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), next, the MODE part determines whether it is within the range of the symbol system command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command and a decoration special drawing 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents the symbol type command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol type command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the single shot type command (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). . The read-ahead symbol system command includes a read-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended. If the jackpot probability when received is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) is used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command processing, and if the jackpot probability when received is a high probability state, the look-ahead The look-ahead symbol-based command processing may be executed using the stop symbol command (low probability).

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the one-shot system command process (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

  When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). . Then, when the MODE part indicates the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demo setting process, the contents of the customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie on the display device 41 are set.

  When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (the result of B1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE part represents an error / incorrectness / how to hit command system command. Is determined (B1315). Examples of the error / incorrectness / stratering instruction system commands include an irregularity generation command, an irregularity cancellation command, a state off command, a state on command, a right stroke instruction notification command, and a left stroke instruction notification command. As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) or a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  Then, when the MODE part indicates an error / incorrectness / how to hit instruction system command (result of B1315 is “Y”), notification or cancellation of notification of error, injustice or hitting (right-handed or left-handed) is given. Error / incorrectness / how-to-type setting processing is executed (B1316), and the single-shot command processing ends.

  When the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 commands the MODE section to switch the production mode (the special figure display process). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “N”), then the production control device 300 indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). When the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single shot system command process is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning hole count command). It is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE section represents the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE part does not represent the count command (result of B1321 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power recovery from step A1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 in FIG. 6B. If the MODE part represents the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

  When the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (result of B1323 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a command for setting change, for example, there is a command (A1030) during changing probability setting. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed on the display device 41.

  If the MODE part does not represent a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). . As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during confirmation of probability setting. Then, when the MODE part indicates a command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

  When the MODE part does not represent the setting confirmation system command (result of B1327 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents an effect adjustment command (B1329). When the MODE part represents the effect adjustment command (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect adjustment information setting process is executed (B1330), and the single shot system command process is ended. In the effect adjustment information setting process, the content of the effect adjustment command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

  When the MODE part does not represent the effect adjustment command (result of B1329 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1331). The command to stop the symbols includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and the symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1331 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1332).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1332 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1333), and after all the symbols stop the game. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1334), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but the game state flag is a flag of "in fluctuation", "in big hit", "in small hit" depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

  On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (result of B1331 is “N”), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1332 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot system command processing.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, when the MODE part indicates a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (A5413) or a decoration special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300 determines that the decoration special figure 1 A process of interrupting or resuming the variable display game may be executed.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch symbol type command processing executed by the production control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 pending (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure pending command is the decorative special figure 1 pending number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

  If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decorative special figure hold number command as the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

  Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a readahead variable system command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a readahead variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variation-type command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command The sub-prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the prefetch variation system command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-preread variation command MODE part and ACT part) after conversion are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. The data is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold display starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same manner.

  Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. . For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach + 1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

  Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetch variable system command processing is ended.

  When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the pre-reading target hold information (latest hold information) from the pre-read variable command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold prefetching effect occurs (result of B1713 is “Y”), the point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). When the prefetching effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1716). When the prefetching effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the prefetching effect during the holding shift (when the holding display is moved, when the number of holdings is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). ). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending lookahead effect does not occur (B1713 result is "N"), or when the generated lookahead effect is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715 result is "N"). As it is. The prefetching variable command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the outlier symbol, the small hit symbol, the 10R probability variable jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type are not consistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

  When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Next, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the MODE part of the variable system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

  When the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the reachable variation, the effect control device 300, the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the set value (probability set value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type To obtain the address (B2005).

  After the steps B2003 and B2005, the production control device 300 performs the lottery for the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). The probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). The probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggesting effect for suggesting the setting value (probability setting value, setting) is determined by lottery or the like (B2012). The content selected by the lottery includes the content that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Next, an effect adjustment process for adjusting an effect is executed (B2013). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2014). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2015). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2016), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (B2017). Next, display setting of hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special map type is performed, and, for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special map that changes this time is reduced is set, and the look-ahead effect during the hold shift is set. Corresponding display information (B1717) is read (B2018). Next, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2019). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. .

  The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the presentation but also by a lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2020), and the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the first to third special symbols. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding is performed (B2021). The fourth symbol variation is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, and / or the display device 41. Subsequently, the accessory action setting process for setting the action of the movable accessory (movable body) is executed (B2022), and the variation effect setting process ends.

  Note that the effect control device 300 performs the setting suggestion effect (B2015), the variable effect (B2016), and the notice effect (B2017) in the variable effect setting process only when the variable display game to be started is the main variable display game. The display setting may be performed, and when the variable display game to be started is the sub variable display game, the setting suggestive effect (B2015), the variable effect (B2016), and the notice effect (B2017) are not executed. It is not necessary to make display settings for these effects.

[Production adjustment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the effect adjustment process (B2013) in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect adjustment process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type is the special figure 1, that is, whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the special figure 1 variation display game (B2030). When the special drawing type is the special drawing 1 (the result of B2030 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is received (B2031). When the effect adjustment command is received (the result of B2031 is "Y"), the variable effect of the special figure 1 variable display game is adjusted (B2032). In the present embodiment, as the adjustment of the variable effect or the like, the SP reach effect is changed to the N reach effect or the no-reach effect so that the SP reach effect is not executed (SP reach effect is prohibited), and the background effect is dedicated. Change to the background effect. After that, the production adjustment process ends.

  The SP reach effect is an example of a specific effect in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the normal expectation, or an effect in which the effect time is longer than the normal effect time, such as a variable effect in step B2032. As the adjustment, it may be adjusted not to execute a particular effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or a step-up notice. The normal degree of expectation is, for example, the degree of expectation of N reach (several percent or less), and the normal effect time may be, for example, several tens of seconds.

  Here, the degree of expectation corresponds to the probability of a big hit when a certain performance (notice) is selected (executed), and the selection rate of that performance when it is a big hit and that when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selection rate of the performance.

  The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated and temporarily stopped for a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variable display game. The step-up notice is an effect in which single effects (sub-effects) set in a plurality of stages are sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (predetermined step). In addition, as the adjustment of the variation effect and the like in step B2032, the above-described predetermined step (predetermined number of times of pseudo variation, predetermined step) of the pseudo continuous effect or step-up notice may be adjusted.

  On the other hand, when the special drawing type is the special drawing 2 (result of B2030 is “N”) or when the effect adjustment command is not received (result of B2031 is “N”), the effect control device 300 The production adjustment process ends without doing anything.

  The effect adjustment command is received when the special figure 1 variable display game starts corresponds to a case where the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game during the big hit change in the normal game state is within a predetermined time ( A3623a). Therefore, if the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is received when the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) starts, the irregularity of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) In preparation for a big hit, even if a specific effect with a high degree of expectation or a specific effect for a long time is set in step B2010 or the like, such a specific effect (here, SP reach effect) is performed in step B2032. (Here, N reach effect or no reach effect), and the background effect can be changed to a dedicated background effect. In the present embodiment, SP reach effect, N reach effect, no reach effect, and background effect are display effects on the display screen of the display device 41.

  In addition, in the normal game state, a player who expects a decorative special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) in which a specific effect with high expectation or a long-time specific effect is executed is If the decorative special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is suddenly forcibly disengaged and stopped due to an irregular jackpot of the game (dependent variable display game), a situation may arise in which the user is surprised or feels strange. However, it is possible to prevent a particular effect from being executed by changing a particular effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to another effect, and to prevent a situation in which the player is surprised or feels strange, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be prevented. Further, since the background of the display screen of the display device 41 becomes a dedicated background by the dedicated background effect, the player is informed that the irregular jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) occurs ( A notice can be given, and the player can prepare for a big hit, such as opening the ball hole 23a of the lower plate 23.

  In the present embodiment, even if the SP reach effect is changed to the N reach effect or the no reach effect, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is the same. However, the game control device 100 changes the variation time of the special display 1 variation display game (corresponding to the added value of A5007) from a long variation time corresponding to the SP reach effect to a short reach corresponding to N reach effect or no reach effect. A configuration of changing to a variable time is also possible.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the stop symbol setting process (B2014) in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a stop symbol setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether the special figure type is the special figure 2, that is, whether the special figure changing display game to be started is the special figure 2 changing display game (B2040). When the special figure type is the special figure 2 (the result of B2040 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the symbol type of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (B2041). When the symbol type is a small hit (the result of B2041 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a production adjustment command is received (B2042). When the effect adjustment command is received (the result of B2042 is "Y"), the stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is set to the detached symbol (the loose pattern that does not correspond to the small hit) (B2043). . Then, the stop symbol setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special figure type is the special figure 1 (the result of B2040 is “N”), the symbol type is not a small hit (the result of B2041 is “N”), or the effect adjustment command is received. If not (the result of B2042 is "N"), the effect control device 300, as usual, the symbol type (departure symbol, small hit symbol, 10R probability variable jackpot symbol, 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, 10R normal jackpot symbol, etc.) A stop symbol corresponding to is set (B2044), and then the stop symbol setting process is ended.

  Receiving the effect adjustment command when the special figure 2 variable display game starts corresponds to the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is in the midst of jackpot fluctuation in the sure variation state or the time saving state (A3621b). For this reason, when the production adjustment command is received when the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) starts, the irregular big hit (first special variable game of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is received. Adjust the performance in preparation for the result). Specifically, even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variation display game) executed in the second special figure variable display section 52 of the collective display device 50 is a small hit result (second special result), a big prize is awarded. Even if the mouth is opened, the stop symbol on the effect displayed on the display device 41 is set to the off symbol which does not correspond to the small hit. In this case, as a stop symbol on the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game, if it is a symbol (result display) that does not correspond to the small hit result, a special symbol may be used in addition to the off symbol.

  As a result, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit result with a high probability as shown in FIG. 25B, but the decoration special figure 2 variable display is displayed on the display device 41 immediately before the irregular big hit. The small hit pattern (small hit result) of the game (main fluctuation display game) is no longer displayed. Therefore, immediately after the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 2 variable display game that has just started is forcibly stopped immediately due to the irregular big hit, resulting in a disengagement result. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is surprised by giving the impression that the small hitting design is suddenly changed to a design on the display device 41. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, before the small hit result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed on the display device 41, a part of the small hit pattern (three symbols of left, right, and inside) is formed. If the design (the left design, the right design, etc.) is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the temporarily stopped design is switched to the one corresponding to the design depending on the irregular big hit.

  Further, the small hit rush state in which small hits frequently occur continues from the start of the probability changing state to the occurrence of the big hit, but it is not pleasing to the player that the small hit rush state ends due to the irregular big hit. Therefore, even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the big winning opening is opened, the small hit symbol is not stopped on the display device 41 (the off symbol or the special symbol which does not correspond to the small hit result is stopped). This makes the player feel uncomfortable, makes it possible to detect the irregular big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game, and notifies the end of the small hit rush state in advance.

  As described above, the production adjustment command in the time saving state or the probability variation state (A3621b) and the normal game state (A3623a) are the same, but even if the same production adjustment command is received, the production control device 300 is in the situation (game. Different processing is executed depending on the status. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed according to the situation (game state). Further, it is not necessary to prepare different effect adjustment commands depending on the situation (game state), and the processing is simplified. As described above, even if the same effect adjustment command is received, even if the result of the main variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a small hit result in the time saving state or the probability variation state, it is displayed on the display device 41. While the stop symbol on the displayed effect is set to the disengaged symbol (separation) (B2043), the variable effect of the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is adjusted in the normal game state (B2032). .

[Accessory operation setting process]
Next, the details of the accessory action setting process (B2022) in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory action setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress or the time is shortening, that is, whether the probability variation state or the time saving state is in effect (B2050). If there is a high probability of special map or during shortening of time (probable variation state or shortening of time) (result of B2050 is "Y"), whether or not the special map type is special drawing 1, that is, the fluctuation of special map starting from now on. It is determined whether or not the display game is the special figure 1 variable display game (B2051). When the special figure type is the special figure 1 (the result of B2051 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the symbol type of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (B2052).

  When the symbol type of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B2052 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 operates the movable accessory (the upper effect unit 40c, the side effect unit 40d, etc.). It is prohibited (B2053). The movable accessory during operation moves to the initial position.

  On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is not in progress or time saving (in the normal gaming state) (result of B2050 is “N”), if special figure type is special figure 2 (result of B2051 is “N”), Alternatively, when the symbol type of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B2052 is “N”), the effect control device 300 normally operates the movable accessory according to the notice effect and the variable effect. Is set (B2054).

  When the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation display game) is forcibly disengaged due to a sudden irregular jackpot, the movable accessory acts as a production of the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation display game) A feeling of strangeness will occur when inside. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game (subordinate variation display game, not long variation) is an irregular big hit in the probability variation state or the time saving state, be prepared for the irregular big hit at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. The operation of the movable accessory is prohibited, and the movable accessory in operation is prevented from moving to the initial position and causing a feeling of strangeness. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special variation 2 variation display game (long-term variation display game) of long variation in the normal game state is an irregular big hit, the operation of the movable accessory is prohibited in order to prevent a decrease in interest. The above processing is not executed, but may be executed.

[Winning command processing]
Details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the big hit fanfare command or the small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit value of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), determines whether the MODE part of the hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit opening command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, The game state flag indicating the game state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state) is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The interval state is set to the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

  When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 ends the effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending state is set to the game state flag showing the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is ended.

  When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process. To do.

[Accessory operation setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the hit command process (FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is a big hit that has occurred during the special figure high probability or during a time saving, that is, whether it is a big hit that has occurred in the probability variation state or the time saving state (B2301). In the case of a big hit that occurs during high probability or shortening of special figure (the result of B2301 is “Y”), the fanfare effect is set as usual, and a large right-handed instruction display (right-handed) is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41. (Display) is set to be displayed (B2306: normal setting).

  Production control device 300, when it is not the big hit which occurs during the special figure high probability or during the time saving (when it is the big hit which occurs during the normal game state) (the result of B2301 is "N"), the big hit this time changes to the special figure 2. It is determined whether or not the display game is a big hit (B2302). When the big hit this time is the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of B2302 is “N”), the fanfare effect is set as usual, and a large right-handing instruction display (right) is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41. Stroke display) is set to be displayed (B2306: normal setting).

  When the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state (the result of B2302 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the customer is waiting, that is, the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. It is determined whether or not is being executed (B2303). When the customer is not waiting (the result of B2303 is "N"), as a special setting 1, a large right-handed instruction display (right-handed display) is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41 without setting a normal fanfare effect. (B2304) (see FIG. 64B (U)). When waiting for a customer (the result of B2303 is “Y”), as a special setting 2, a small right-handed instruction display (right-handed display) is reduced in the upper right corner of the display device 41 without setting the normal fanfare production. Is set to be displayed (B2305) (see FIG. 65A (tsu)).

〔Time chart〕
61 and FIG. 62 are respectively times for exemplifying the states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the above game control and effect control in the normal game state and the time saving state / probability variation state, respectively. It is a chart.

  In the example (normal game state) of FIG. 61, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is executed a plurality of times during the variation of the special variable 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game is an irregular big hit because the big hit flag 2 is set. As described above, the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a long time variation (long variation, here a variation time of 590 seconds).

  When the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game falls within a predetermined time (200 seconds in this case) (result of A3621a is "Y"), the irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag is set (A3622a). After that, every time the special figure 1 variable display game is started (at the start of each special figure 1 variable display game), an effect adjustment command for adjusting effects is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. . Then, when the jackpot result of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped at the result.

  In the example of FIG. 62 (time saving state or probability changing state), the special variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is executed a plurality of times while the special variable display game, which is the sub variable display game, is changing. Here, the special figure 1 variable display game is an irregular big hit because the big hit flag 1 is set. Even in the sub variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game in the time saving state or the probability changing state is not a long time variation (long variation) but a variation time of 4 seconds, for example. Therefore, the number of times of the main variation display game executed during the secondary variation display game which is an irregular jackpot is greater in the example of FIG. 62 (time saving state or probability variation state) than in the example of FIG. 61 (normal game state). Few.

  After the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, every time the special figure 2 variable display game is started (at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game), a production adjustment command for adjusting the production is issued. It is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Then, when the jackpot result of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the off result.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game executed a plurality of times in FIG. 62 results in a small hit, the change time measurement by the special figure 1 game processing timer (update of the special figure 1 game processing timer) is interrupted. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. After that, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the small hitting operation relating to the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted. It should be noted that, even during the interruption, the fluctuation of the special symbol (identification information) itself in the special figure 1 display device 51 and the display device 41 may be apparently continued.

[Demonstration example when irregular big hit occurs from normal game state]
FIG. 63 is a time chart showing an example of effects realized by the game control and the effect control described above, in the case where an irregular jackpot occurs from the normal game state.

  FIG. 63 (a) corresponds to a part of FIG. 61, but during the change of the special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game) which is an irregular jackpot, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) ) Is executed multiple times. It should be noted that after the start of the special figure 2 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot, n (1 time in FIG. 63) special figure 1 variable display game may be started by time T1.

  At time T1, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, an irregular big hit occurs, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a predetermined time, and the irregular big hit effect adjustment is performed during the special figure 2 variable display game. The flag is set (A3622a). After time T1 until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, at the start of each special figure 1 variable display game, a production adjustment command (A3623a) for adjusting the production and a variation command (A5012, A5013) including information on the variation pattern. Both) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. On the other hand, before the time T1, the variation command is transmitted but the effect adjustment command is not transmitted at the start of each special figure 1 variation display game.

  On the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special map 1 variable display game (main variable display game) started before time T1 is displayed in a large symbol (large symbol) in the center of the display screen. On the other hand, after the time T1, the effect control device 300 does not execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) having a higher expectation of a big hit or a longer effect time than usual by receiving the effect adjustment command. Along with the setting, the background of the display screen of the display device 41 is changed to a dedicated background (B2032). For example, as a dedicated background image (predetermined image, predetermined background image), a large character image of "large chance" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a special image is displayed around the character display. Moreover, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 1 variable display game as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen so as not to disturb the exclusive background.

  Note that the decoration special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen of the display device 41, but it is also possible not to display it. Is.

  After that, at time T2, the special figure 2 variable display game which is an irregular big hit ends and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the big hit is confirmed), and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the off symbol. At time T2, a symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command and decoration special figure 2 stop command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The dedicated background of the display device 41 does not have to change.

  After that, at the time T3, the big hit fanfare command (A5809) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the big hit fanfare time (A5813) starts. In addition, at time T3, the effect control device 300 switches the display on the display screen of the display device 41 from the dedicated background to the large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 (right-hand hit display) by receiving the big hit fanfare command ( Special setting of B2304 1). Note that the jackpot fanfare production that is normally executed is not performed.

  After that, at time T4, even if the big hit fanfare time elapses, there is a waiting time for the gate to pass until the game ball passes the universal figure starting gate 34 (so-called pounding gate) by right-handing, and the big hit state (opening the big winning opening) (Round)) does not occur (result of A6003 is “N”). As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit state regardless of the player's intention. In addition, when the game ball passes the universal figure starting gate 34 by hitting right during the big hit fanfare time, it becomes a big hit state when the big hit fanfare time has elapsed (waiting time for gate passage = 0).

  After that, at time T5, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 by the player starting right-handing, the jackpot round starts and the special winning opening is opened (A6004-A6027). In addition, at time T5, the round command (A6011) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that has received the round command replaces the large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 with a big hit on the entire screen. To start the round production.

  FIG. 63B exemplifies a case where the customer waiting state is in progress during the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game which is an irregular jackpot. That is, before the time T2 when the result of the irregular jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed while the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is changing. At the same time, the special figure 1 reservation number is 0. Therefore, the customer waiting state is in effect even during the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, and a customer waiting demo such as a demo movie is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 (A3419, B1308). In addition, when the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is before the customer wait state, as a customer wait demonstration, three numbers such as a special special design (“3, 3, 3”) of the big hit are prepared. Thing) may be displayed. Even after the time T2 has passed, the customer waiting state does not change until the time T3.

  In the present embodiment, even if the subsidiary variable display game (here, the special figure 2 variable display game) is being executed, the main variable display game (here, the special figure 1 variable display game) is not changing, and If the number of holdings related to the main variable display game (here, the number of holdings of special figure 1) is 0, a customer waiting state is entered (A3401, A3406, A3416 in FIG. 16).

  At time T3, the big hit fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Upon receiving the big hit fanfare command, the performance control device 300 ends the customer waiting demonstration on the display screen of the display device 41 and displays a small right-handing instruction display 658 (reduced right-handing display) at the upper right corner of the display screen ( B2305 special settings 2). Note that the fanfare production that is normally executed is not performed.

  Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 63 (a), the jackpot fanfare time from time T3 to time T4 and the waiting time for passing through the gate from time T4 to time T5 have elapsed, and at time T5, the game ball is in the normal state. After passing through the starting gate 34, the effect control device 300 that has received the round command starts the big hit round effect.

  In the example of FIG. 63 (b), since there is a high possibility that the player is not in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 (unmanned state) while waiting for customers in the normal gaming state (special probability low probability and no time saving), the time is longer. A small inconspicuous right-hand hitting instruction display 658 is displayed on the display device 41 from T3 to time T5. If a large noticeable right-handing instruction is displayed, an unrelated person (a person who is walking in the game hall) who does not generate a starting prize (a prize for the ordinary variable winning device 37) that is an irregular jackpot in the unmanned state. (A person or the like) notices a noticeable right-handing instruction display, makes a right-handed stroke, passes the game ball through the universal figure starting gate 34, and an unfair situation occurs in which a big-hit round game is played. However, by displaying a small inconspicuous right-handing instruction display 658 from time T3 to time T5 on the display device 41, it is possible to prevent such an unfair situation by making it difficult for an unrelated person to notice the right-handing instruction display.

  Similarly to FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 63 (c) also illustrates an example of a case where the customer is in a waiting state during a change in the special figure 2 variable display game in which an irregular big hit occurs. Between time T3 and time T5, which is the period until the command is transmitted, at the time Ta, the special figure 1 hold (first start memory, special figure 1 start memory) is generated due to winning at the start winning opening 36. Even if the special figure 1 suspension occurs between time T3 and time T5, the special figure 1 variable display game does not start because the big hit state occurs.

  At the time Ta after the irregular big hit is confirmed (special figure 2 game processing number is "3"), with the occurrence of special figure 1 suspension (winning into the starting winning opening 36), the right-handing instruction notification command is a game control device. It is transmitted from 100 to the performance control device 300 (A2705, A2706). Upon receiving this right-handing instruction notification command, the production control device 300 displays the right-handing instruction display 658 (reduced right-handing display), which was displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen after time T3, on the large right-hand side on the entire screen. The display is switched to the instruction display 657 (right-handed display) (B1316). The fact that the special figure 1 hold (winning to the start winning hole 36) has occurred is not an unmanned state, but the player who has generated the special figure 1 hold does right strike according to the large right strike instruction display 657. The game ball is passed through the universal starting gate 34 so that a big game round game can be performed.

[Screen transition 1 (i)]
64A and 64B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, and show a case where an irregular jackpot occurs from the normal gaming state. 64A and 64B correspond to a part of FIG. 63 (a).

  FIG. 64A shows a display screen immediately before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal game state. In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “9, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in large size. In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is the subsidiary variable display game in the normal game state, is variably displayed. In the special figure 2 variable display game which is changing, the big hit result (irregular big hit) is displayed later. In the display device 41, the variation of the sub variable display game (here, the special figure 2 variable display game) and the deviation result may not be displayed, and only the big hit result (big hit pattern) may be displayed. The variable display of the sub variable display game may be performed with only one decorative special symbol.

  Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the two-variation display game has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). On the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main change display game). Four (1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “4”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “4”.

  Subsequently, in (a), the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game are both in a running (changing) state. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

  Further, in (a), each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the adjacent special figure 1 hold display 620a on the first display unit 620 (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold exhaustion area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game before execution, whereas the special view of the hold exhausted area 640 is displayed. The 1-hold display 620b is a start memory display (fluctuating hold display) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "3", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

  The special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is displayed in the first display mode, and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game is displayed in the second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a display mode larger than the second display mode, and is a mode in which the main display is displayed large in the central portion of the display screen, and the second display mode is a sub-display as an edge of the display screen. It is a display mode in which a small display is made in the section. That is, the changing decorative special symbol (decorative symbol) is a large symbol in the first display mode and a small symbol in the second display mode. The first display mode is a mode in which a decorative special pattern (decorative pattern) is variably displayed by being formed by characters, numbers, and a frame, and the second display mode is a decorative special pattern (decorative pattern) formed by only numbers. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which it is displayed and variably displayed. Further, each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in two types of modes, a first display mode and a second display mode.

  Next, in (C), the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is in the reach state (normal reach), and in the variable display area 610, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same symbol “3”. Is displayed.

  Then, in (d), since the system (type) of the reach effect related to the special figure 1 variable display game is SP reach (for example, SP1 reach), the reach is changed from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, and the display screen is displayed. While the movie effect (moving image effect) is executed in the center of, the left symbol and the right symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game move to the upper corner of the screen.

  Note that (d) corresponds to the display screen at time T1 in FIG. 63 (a), and the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game that is an irregular jackpot is the predetermined time. Since the SP reach effect is an effect related to the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) started before time T1, it is executed as it is without being switched to another effect (without being prohibited). To be done.

  Next, in (e), the special figure 1 variable display game ends, and in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the detachment stop symbol “3, 4, 3” is a large symbol (large symbol, first symbol). 1 display mode, main display). In addition, the first predetermined image 675 has a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the special figure 1 hold display 620b (fluctuating hold display) of the hold digestion area 640 is Disappeared.

  Subsequently, in (f), the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯”. Due to the holding shift, the special figure 1 holding display 620b is displayed in the holding exhausting area 640 as a changing holding display. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 is decreased from “3” to “2”.

  At the start of the special display 1 variable display game of (f), the production control device 300 receives a production adjustment command, so that a specific production with high expectation such as SP reach production or a specific production with a long production time. Is not executed, and on the display screen of the display device 41, an image of a dedicated background consisting of a large character image “large chance” in the center of the display screen and a special image (indicated by diagonal lines) around it is displayed. In addition, in the special display 1 variable display game so as not to get in the way of the exclusive background, the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen is variably displayed in the second display mode (sub display) with a small decorative special symbol (small symbol). It In the case of the exclusive background, the hold displays 620a and 620b, which are displays related to the hold, and the frame of the hold exhausted area 640 may be erased.

  Subsequently, in (B) of FIG. 64B, the special figure 1 variable display game ends, and in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the detachment stop symbol “8, 3, 5” is a small symbol (small symbol). , Second display mode, sub-display). In addition, the first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 hold display 620b of the hold digestion area 640 disappears.

  Next, in (H), the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed (changing). The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯”. Due to the holding shift, the special figure 1 holding display 620b is displayed in the holding exhausting area 640 as a changing holding display. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 decreases from “2” to “1”. When the production control device 300 receives the production adjustment command at the time of starting the special display 1 variable display game, a specific production with a high expectation such as an SP reach production or a specific production with a long production time is continuously performed. Is not executed and a dedicated background is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game is variably displayed with a small decorative special pattern (small pattern) in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

  Subsequently, (X) corresponds to the display screen at time T2 in FIG. 63 (a). Here, the special figure 2 variable display game ends with a big hit result (irregular big hit), and the big hit stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed with a small symbol in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. It In addition, as a big hit stop design, "○, ○, ○" or the like may be displayed. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended by the result of the deviation, and in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the deviation stop symbols "7, 4, 9" are displayed in small symbols. In addition, the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 have a symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 reservation display 620b in the reservation digestion area 640 disappears.

  Next, (U) corresponds to the display screen at time T3 in FIG. 63 (a). Here, in response to the reception of the big hit fanfare command in the effect control device 300, a dedicated background image such as a character image "Large chance" is displayed on the display screen as a large right-handed instruction display 657 (right). It is switched to the image of (strike display). After that, the jackpot fanfare time and the waiting time for passing the gate pass.

  Next, (S) corresponds to the display screen at time T5 in FIG. Here, in response to the reception of the round command in the effect control device 300, the image of the large right hitting instruction display 657 (right hitting display) on the full screen is the image of the big hit round effect on the full screen (moving image). Is switched to.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game (secondary variable display game) which is a big hit result (first special result) is changing, and the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is When the time is equal to or less than the predetermined time, an effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when each special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) starts. Then, the effect control device 300, in response to the received effect adjustment command (predetermined information), is a specific effect (SP reach or pseudo continuous) that is an effect having a higher expectation than usual or an effect that is longer than usual. Set not to execute effects etc.). As a result, in FIG. 64A (F) to FIG. 64B (K), since the production with a high degree of expectation related to each special map 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed or the long-time effect is not executed, 2 It is possible to prevent the situation where the player is surprised because the 2 variable display game suddenly becomes an irregular big hit.

  Further, the irregular big hit can be notified by the display of the dedicated background in FIGS. 64A to 64B. Furthermore, the special background is displayed after a considerable time has elapsed from the start of the special display 2 variable display game (prior to FIG. 64A (A)), so that the player recognizes the irregular jackpot. 2 It is significantly behind the start of the variable display game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the launch of the game ball immediately after the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and to keep the interest of the game for a considerable time from the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. It can be continued.

[Screen transition 1 (ii)]
FIG. 65A and FIG. 65B are an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, and an irregular jackpot occurs while waiting for customers in the normal gaming state (low probability of special figure and no time saving). The case is shown. 65A and 65B correspond to FIG. 63 (b) and FIG. 63 (c), respectively.

  In (A) of FIG. 65A, a customer waiting demo such as a demo movie is displayed on the display screen. The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is executing (changing) the special figure 2 variable display game. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “0”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “1”. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed even when the special figure 2 variable display game (dependent variable display game) is changing, and the special figure 1 hold number is 0. If so, the customer waits. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, which is a subsidiary variable display game, is not displayed on the display device 41 (variable display area 615).

  Next, (h) corresponds to the display screen at time T2 in FIG. 63 (b), the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) ends, and the jackpot stop symbols “5, 5, 5” Is displayed. In addition, as a big hit stop design, "○, ○, ○" or the like may be displayed.

  Next, (T) corresponds to the display screen at time T3 in FIG. 63 (b), which is different from the large right-hand instruction display 657 in FIG. A small right-hand hitting instruction display 658 is displayed so as not to be conspicuous in the upper right corner of the display screen. As a result, an unrelated person (such as a person walking in the game hall) does not notice that the big hit has occurred in the game machine 10. It should be noted that when the game machine 10 is not in an unmanned state and a player is seated, the right-hand hitting instruction display 658 is displayed in a size noticeable by the player.

  Next, (TE) corresponds to the display screen at time T5 in FIG. 63 (b), and the jackpot round effect has been started. It should be noted that the jackpot round effect is displayed in a small size so as not to be conspicuous in a predetermined area 41a of the display screen, unlike (S) of FIG. 64B. As a result, an unrelated person (such as a person walking in the game hall) does not notice that a big hit has occurred in the game machine 10. Note that, as in the case of (b) in FIG. 64B, the big hit round effect may be displayed on the entire screen.

  Although (T) to (T) in FIG. 65B are the same as (T) to (T) in FIG. 65A, in (T ′) in FIG. 65B, corresponding to the time Ta in FIG. 63 (C), Due to the occurrence of the suspension of special figure 1 (winning to the start winning hole 36), the small right-handing instruction display 658 (reduced right-handing display) is changed to a large right-handing instruction display 657 (right-handing on the full screen). Display). This suggests right-handed striking so that it is conspicuous to the player who generated the special figure 1 hold.

  After that, in (T ') of FIG. 65B, the big hit round effect is displayed on the entire screen, corresponding to the time T5 of FIG. 63C, as in the case of (SA) of FIG. 64B. Therefore, the round effect is displayed so as to be conspicuous to the player who generated the special figure 1 hold.

[Demonstration example when irregular big hit occurs from time saving state or probability changing state]
FIG. 66 is a time chart showing an example of effects realized by the game control and the effect control described above, in the case where an irregular big hit occurs from the time saving state or the probability changing state (small hit rush state).

  FIG. 66A corresponds to a part of FIG. 62, but the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times during the change of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot. In the present embodiment, the decoration special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed as a large symbol (large symbol) in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. On the other hand, the decoration special symbol of the special map 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen of the display device 41, but the special symbol 1 variable display game is not displayed. A configuration is also possible.

  Since it is a time-saving state or a probability changing state, the action of the movable accessory is prohibited at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, and the movable accessory in action is returned to the initial position (B2053). ).

  From the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game, both the effect adjustment command (A3621b) and the variable command (A5012, A5013) are sent from the game control device 100. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. On the other hand, before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game, the change command is transmitted, but the effect adjustment command is not transmitted.

  Before the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (subordinate variation display game), which is an irregular jackpot, because the production adjustment command is not received (the result of A3620b is "N", the result of B2042 is "N"), the production control device 300 sets a stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41 in accordance with the symbol type (outlier symbol, small hit symbol, large hit symbol, etc.) (B2044).

  However, after the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (subordinate variation display game), which is an irregular jackpot, the effect control device 300 causes the production adjustment command at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation display game). Is received (result of A3620b is “Y”, result of B2042 is “Y”). Therefore, the effect control device 300 displays the special figure 2 variable display game executed on the second special figure variable display section 52 of the collective display device 50 even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the big winning opening is opened. The stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the effect in the device 41 is set to the disengaged symbol (the symbol which does not correspond to the small hit result) (B2043). This allows the player to prepare for an irregular big hit.

  After that, at time T2, the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular big hit ends and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the big hit is confirmed), and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the off symbol. At time T2, a symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command and decoration special figure 2 stop command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. At time T2, the decoration special symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped and displayed from the time of variation, but is displayed as a large deviant symbol (large symbol).

  After that, at the time T3, the big hit fanfare command (A5809) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the big hit fanfare time (A5813) starts. At time T3, the effect control device 300 receives the big hit fanfare command, displays the big hit fanfare effect on the display screen of the display device 41, and displays a large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 on the entire screen (B2306). .

  After that, at the time T4, the big hit fanfare time elapses and the big hit fanfare production ends, but it becomes a waiting time for the gate to pass until the game ball passes the universal figure starting gate 34 (so-called pounding gate) by right hitting, and the big hit state. (Opening the special winning opening (round)) does not start (the result of A6003 is "N"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit state regardless of the player's intention. In addition, when the game ball passes the universal figure starting gate 34 by hitting right during the big hit fanfare time, it becomes a big hit state when the big hit fanfare time has elapsed (waiting time for gate passage = 0).

  After that, at time T5, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 by the player starting right-handing, the jackpot round starts and the special winning opening is opened (A6004-A6027). In addition, at time T5, the round command (A6011) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that has received the round command replaces the large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 with a big hit on the entire screen. To start the round production.

  FIG. 66B exemplifies a case where the customer waiting state is in progress during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) which is an irregular jackpot. That is, before the time T2 when the result of the irregular jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed while the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is changing. At the same time, the special figure 2 reservation number is 0. Therefore, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is changing, it is in a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie is being executed on the display screen of the display device 41 (A3514, B1308). In addition, when the big hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game is before the customer wait state, as a customer wait demonstration, three numbers such as big special decoration symbols (“3, 3, 3”, etc. are set) Thing) may be displayed. Even after the time T2 has passed, the customer waiting state does not change until the time T3.

  In the present embodiment, even if the subsidiary variable display game (here, the special figure 1 variable display game) is being executed, the main variable display game (here, the special figure 2 variable display game) is not changing, and If the number of holdings (the number of holdings for special figure 2) related to the main variable display game is 0, it becomes a customer waiting state (A3501, A3502, A3512 in FIG. 17).

  At time T3, the big hit fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Upon receiving the big hit fanfare command, the production control device 300 ends the customer waiting demonstration on the display screen of the display device 41, displays the fanfare production on the display screen of the display device 41, and instructs the player to make a large right hit on the entire screen. The display 657 is displayed (B2306).

  Then, after time T3, the same effect as in the case of FIG. 63A is executed.

  In the example of FIG. 66B, since there is a high possibility that the player is near the gaming machine 10 while waiting for a customer in the time saving state or the probability changing state, a large right-handing instruction display is conspicuous from time T3 to time T5. 657 is displayed on the display device 41.

  Similarly to FIG. 66 (b), FIG. 66 (c) also illustrates a case where the customer waiting state is in progress during the change of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) which is an irregular jackpot. Between the time T3 and the time T5, which is the period from the big hit fanfare command transmission to the round command transmission, at the time Ta, the special variable 2 winning device 37 wins the special figure 2 (second start memory, special figure 2 start memory). ) Has occurred. Even if the special figure 2 suspension occurs between time T3 and time T5, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start because the big hit state occurs. While waiting for customers in the time saving state or the probability changing state, since it is already in a state where a right hit is required, unlike in FIG. 63 (c), at the time Ta, the right hit instruction notification command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, After time T3, the same effect as in the case of FIG. 63 (b) is executed.

[Screen transition 2 (i)]
67A, 67B, and 67C are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, and show a case where an irregular jackpot occurs from the time saving state or the probability variation state. 67A, 67B, and 67C correspond to a part of FIG. 66 (a).

  FIG. 67A shows the display screen immediately before the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is the main variable display game in the time saving state or the probable variation state, is started. In the variation display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols "3, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 2 variation display game are displayed in large size. In the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game), which is the sub variable display game in the time saving state or the probable variation state, is variably displayed. The special figure 1 variable display game which is changing here is to display the deviation result later. In the display device 41, it is possible to display only the big hit result (big hit pattern) without displaying the result which is different from the change of the sub variable display game (here, the special figure 1 change display game). The variable display of the display game may be performed with only one decorative special pattern.

  Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbol "○" indicates that is being executed (changing). On the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game (main change display game). 2 Start memory display) is displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “4”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “4”.

  Then, in (ii), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the sub variable display game, are both in execution (changing). The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 also has a symbol “◯”.

  In addition, in (ii), each special figure 2 hold display 630a is moved to the display position of the adjacent special figure 2 hold display 630a on the second display unit 630 (hold shift). Further, the special figure 2 hold display 630a located at the right end of the second display unit 630 is moved from the second display unit 630 to the hold exhaustion area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 2 hold display 630a of the second display unit 630 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display 630a) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game before execution, whereas the special display of the hold exhausted area 640 is specified. The hold display 630b in FIG. 2 is a start memory display (change-in-progress display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "4", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "3".

  The special figure 2 variable display game to be the main variable display game is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen as the main display in the first display mode (large pattern), and the special figure 1 variable display game to be the sub variable display game is In the second display mode (small pattern), a small display is made in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen as a sub display.

  After that, in (u), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) "1, 2, 3" is derived and displayed on the display screen. Largely displayed as a large pattern at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. When the result of the special variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes a small hit result, the special variable display game, which is the subsidiary variable display game, is interrupted (the update of the special process 1 game processing timer is Stop). However, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the variation of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game continues apparently.

  In addition, in (u), the small hit fanfare effect is executed in the central portion of the display screen. As a part of the small hit fanfare production, a congratulation production is performed in which a message "Congratulations on small hit" is displayed to celebrate and inform the occurrence of the small hit. Further, as the small hit fanfare effect, entering the "tiger mode" as the effect mode corresponding to the small hit state is notified as "tiger mode entry". Then, since it is a small hit state, a right hitting instruction display 659 of an intermediate size is displayed on the upper right of the display screen in order to recommend the player to hit the right hand.

  The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “Δ” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

  Subsequently, in (E), the effect during the small hit is executed by character display or the like in the central portion of the display screen. The effect in the small hit is an effect corresponding to the effect mode “tiger mode”. Although not shown, the small hit ending effect may be executed at the end of the small hit state.

  After that, in (o), the small hit state is finished, the hold shift is executed in the second display portion 630, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game which is the main variable display game is started in the variable display area 610 by the main display. To do. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game which is a sub variable display game is restarted (the update of the special figure 1 game processing timer is restarted), but in the variable display area 613 at the left end portion of the display screen, the fluctuation itself does not occur during the interruption There is no change as it seems to continue.

  Further, in (o), the first predetermined image 675 has the symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 also has the symbol “◯”. The special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "4", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "2".

  After that, in (), the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped and displayed in the variable display area 613 with the off symbol “9, 5, 2”. The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. However, since the special figure 2 variable display game is not affected by the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game, it changes in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen.

  Then, in (ki), the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot is started in the variable display area 613. Here, the first predetermined image 675 changes to a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 changes from "4" to "3". To do.

  After that, in (K), the special figure 2 variable display game results in a loss, and in the variable display area 610, it stops at the shift symbol “7, 9, 2”. The special figure 2 variable display game has a symbol "x" indicating that it is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. It should be noted that this special figure 2 variable display game is started before the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular big hit, and a production adjustment command at the time of start is not transmitted, so it is a small hit. In this case, as usual, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with the small hit pattern, and a small hit effect such as a small hit fanfare effect or a small hit medium effect is executed.

  Subsequently, in (K), the hold shift is executed, and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the main variable display game is started in the variable display area 610 by the main display. Further, the second predetermined image 676 changes to a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 changes from "2" to "1". . Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game starts after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot, the effect control command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

  After that, in (c), the special figure 2 variable display game which is the main variable display game has a small hit result and the big winning opening is opened. In the present embodiment, the small right-hand hitting instruction display 658 is displayed so as not to be conspicuous in the upper right corner of the display screen, but it may not be displayed. In (c), unlike the out-of-range fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game in (u) of FIG. 67A, since the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit result is in the process of changing, the effect adjustment command is used. The decorative special figure 2 variable display game, which is a variable display game of No., does not stop at the small hit symbol "1,2,3" but stops at the deviating symbol "3,6,8" (the display device 41 stops at the small hit symbol) do not do). In the second special figure variation display section 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. Further, here, if the symbol does not correspond to the small hit result, a special symbol (for example, "?,?,?") May be displayed on the display device 41 instead of the off symbol "3,6,8".

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the update of the special figure 1 game processing timer is stopped). However, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the variation of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game continues apparently. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “Δ” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

  Next, in (S), the hold shift is executed, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 by the main display. Further, the first predetermined image 675 changes to a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 changes from “1” to “0”. .

  After that, in (), the special figure 1 variable display game ends with a big hit result (irregular big hit), and in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, a small symbol (small symbol, second display mode, sub-symbol) is displayed. Big hit stop design "7,7,7" is displayed in (Display). In addition, "○, ○, ○" may be displayed as the jackpot stop design. Further, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended by the result of deviation, and in the central variable display area 610 of the display screen, the deviation stop symbol "2, 4, 9" is a large symbol (large symbol, first symbol). Display mode, main display). In addition, the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 have a symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 hold display 630b (changing hold display) of the hold digestion area 640 disappears.

  Next, (S) corresponds to the time T3 of FIG. 66 (a), and in response to the reception of the big hit fanfare command at the effect control device 300, a large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 on the entire display screen is displayed. Is displayed and the jackpot fanfare effect is displayed. For example, a character image "bonus" is displayed as a big hit fanfare effect.

  Thereafter, (se) corresponds to time T4 in FIG. 66 (a), and after the jackpot fanfare time has elapsed, the jackpot fanfare production is completed and only the large right-handed instruction display 657 on the full screen is displayed on the display screen. Is displayed.

  Next, (S) corresponds to time T5 of FIG. 66 (a), and after the jackpot fanfare time and the waiting time for passing through the gate have elapsed, in response to reception of the round command by the performance control device 300, all of them are performed. On the screen, an image (moving image) of the jackpot round effect is displayed.

  As described above, when the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) that is the big hit result (first special result) is changing in the time saving state or the probability changing state, each special figure 2 variable display game ( A production adjustment command (predetermined information) is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the main variation display game starts. Then, as shown in (B) of FIG. 67B, the effect control device 300, in response to the received effect adjustment command (predetermined information), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is a small hit. Even if the special winning opening is opened as a result (second special result), the stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41 is set to the detached symbol.

  In this way, even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the special winning opening is opened, the small hit symbol is not stopped on the display device 41 (the symbol not corresponding to the small hit result is stopped). It is possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness and to notify in advance that the time saving state or the probability variation state (small hitting rush state) will end due to the irregular big hit. Therefore, the player is not surprised that the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the irregular big hit, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the irregular big hit.

[Screen transition 2 (ii)]
FIG. 68 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, and shows a case where an irregular jackpot occurs while waiting for a customer in the time saving state or the probability changing state. FIG. 68 corresponds to FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 66 (c), respectively.

  In (a) of FIG. 68, a customer waiting demo such as a demo movie is displayed on the display screen. The special figure 1 variable display game is moving in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game being stopped. The symbol "x" indicates that The special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “1”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “0”. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed even if the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is changing, and the special figure 2 hold number is 0. If so, the customer waits.

  Next, (C) corresponds to the display screen at time T2 in FIG. 66B, the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) ends, and the jackpot stop symbol “in the variable display area 613 5, 5, 5 "is displayed.

  Next, (T) corresponds to the display screen at time T3 in FIG. 66 (b), the customer waiting demonstration is finished on the display screen, and the jackpot fanfare effect (of "bonus") is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. (Character display), and a large right-hand hitting instruction display 657 is displayed on the entire screen. In the time saving state or the probability variation state, even when waiting for customers, the game machine 10 is not in an unmanned state, and there is a high possibility that the player is in the vicinity of the game machine 10. Therefore, in a noticeably large mode (second mode). The right hitting instruction display 657 is displayed on the display device 41. On the other hand, as described above, in the normal game state, there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 is in an unmanned state while waiting for customers. Therefore, in order to prevent an unrelated person from playing a round game of a big hit, a right-handed instruction is given. The right-hand hitting instruction display 658 in a mode smaller than the display 657 (first mode) is displayed on the display device 41 so as to be inconspicuous.

  Next, (e) corresponds to the display screen at time T4 in FIG. 66 (b), and after the jackpot fanfare time has elapsed, the jackpot fanfare production ends, and a large right hit on the entire screen is displayed on the display screen. Only the instruction display 657 is displayed.

  Next, (and) corresponds to the display screen at time T5 in FIG. 63 (b), it is highly possible that the gaming machine 10 is not in the unmanned state, and the big hit round effect is started on the entire screen.

  It is to be noted that, from (1) to (and) of FIG. 68, at the time Ta between the time T3 and the time T5, the special variable 2 is held (the second starting memory, the special FIG. 2 starting memory) due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37. ) Occurs, the effect on the display screen is the same.

  In this way, when an irregular big hit occurs from waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer), a predetermined display (right-handing instruction display) is displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with a change in the gaming state. (6) Irregular jackpot from the time saving state or probability change state (second game state) and the irregular jackpot from the normal game state (first game state) of FIG. Is displayed. That is, in the time saving state or the probability variation state (second game state), a predetermined display (right hitting instruction display) is displayed in a conspicuous second mode, and in a normal game state (first game state), a predetermined mode is not conspicuous. A display (right-hand instruction display) is displayed. It should be noted that the jackpot fanfare effect may be executed in FIG. 65B (tsu), and the jackpot fanfare effect may be displayed as a predetermined display in a mode different from that of FIG. 68 (a small mode that is inconspicuous). The inconspicuous first mode may be not only a small mode but also a translucent mode or a light mode, and the conspicuous second mode may be not only a large mode but also a non-transparent mode or a dark mode.

  Although the first embodiment has been described as above, the process of the effect control device 300 when the effect adjustment command is received is not limited to the case where the normal game state is different from the case where the time saving state or the probability variation state is different. The same process may be executed, or the process in the normal game state and the process in the time saving state or the probability variation state may be replaced with those described above or appropriately changed.

[Operation / Effect of First Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 variably displays the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area or the entry of the game ball into the sub starting area different from the main starting area. It is provided with game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the variable display game and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect associated with the variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated. The game control means (game control device 100) is a main variation display game executed based on the entry of a game ball into the main starting area, and a sub-routine executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub starting area. Both the variable display games can be in a changing state, and the main variable display game is forcibly ended when the sub variable display game has a special result (big hit result). The game control means (game control device 100) starts the main variable display game when the secondary variable display game which is a special result (big hit) is changing and the remaining change time is within a predetermined time. Predetermined information (for example, a production adjustment command) is transmitted to the production control means. The effect control means (effect control device 300) sets, when receiving the predetermined information, not to execute a specific effect (SP reach or the like, which has a higher expectation than usual or an effect for a long time).

  Therefore, it can be prevented that the special variation (irregular big hit) of the subsidiary variation display game suddenly and forcibly terminates the main variation display game in the middle of the specific effect, and the interest of the game is reduced. Further, since the game control means (game control device 100) does not transmit the predetermined information (for example, the production adjustment command) to the production control means until the remaining variation time of the sub variable display game falls within the predetermined time, the sub variation. The player's recognition of the special result (irregular jackpot) of the display game is significantly delayed from the start of the slave variable display game, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being deteriorated.

  In the first embodiment, the predetermined time may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the main fluctuation display game. In this way, it is possible to secure time for replacing a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) with another effect (for example, N reach effect or no-reach effect).

  In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) sets not to execute a specific effect when predetermined information is received, and a predetermined image (for example, a background image) on the display device 41. May be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to notify (announce) a big hit (irregular big hit) of the sub variable display game.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a first starting area (for example, a starting winning opening 36) and a second starting area different from the first starting area (for example, a normal variation winning device 37). The game control means (game control device 100) is recommended to enter the game ball into the first starting area, and the first starting area is the main starting area and the second starting area is the sub starting area. A game state (normal game state) and entry of a game ball into the second starting area is recommended, and a second starting area serves as a main area and a first starting area serves as a secondary area. State or probable change state). In the first game state (normal game state), the game control means (game control device 100) is changing the sub variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) which is a special result (big hit) and the remaining change. When the time is within a predetermined time, when the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) starts, predetermined information (for example, effect adjustment command) is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

  Accordingly, in the first game state (normal game state) in which the sub variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) has a long variation, the game control means (game control device 100) determines the remaining variation time of the sub variable display game. Since predetermined information (for example, production adjustment command) is not transmitted to the production control means until is within a predetermined time, it becomes significantly slower for the player to recognize the big hit (irregular big hit) of the sub variable display game, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) performs the main variation display game executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area and the entry of the game ball into the sub starting area. It is possible to bring both the sub-variable display games that are executed based on the state of variation, and when the sub-variable display game has the first special result (big hit result), the main variable display game is forcibly forced. To finish. The game control means (game control device 100), when the sub variable display game that is the first special result (big hit result) is changing, predetermined information (for example, a production adjustment command when the main change display game starts). ) Is transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display the decorative variable display game corresponding to the main variable display game as an effect on the display device 41, and after the predetermined information is received, the main variable display game receives the second special display game. Even if the result (small hit result) is obtained, a result (outcome result or the like) that does not correspond to the second special result (small hit result) is displayed on the display device 41 as the result of the ornament variation display game.

  In this way, even if the main variation display game has the second special result (small hit result) before the subsidiary variation display game has the first special result (irregular jackpot result), the main variation display game is supported. As a result of the decorative variable display game, the second special result (small hit result) cannot be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the irregular jackpot result by making the player feel uncomfortable and knowing in advance that the secondary variation display game will be the first special result (irregular jackpot result). It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the.

  In the first embodiment, in the second game state (time saving state or probability variation state), the main variation display game starts when the subsidiary variation display game with the first special result (irregular jackpot result) is varying. At that time, predetermined information may be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). By doing this, in the second game state (time saving state or probability changing state), the secondary variable display game becomes the first special result (irregular big hit result) and the second game state (time saving state or probability changing state) ends. It is possible to let the player know in advance what to do.

  In the first embodiment, when the sub variable display game that is a special result is changing, predetermined information (effect adjustment command) is sent to the effect control means (effect control device 300) when the main variable display game starts. When the predetermined information is received, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of transmitting a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect or a small hit result of a decorative variable display game corresponding to the main variable display game). Display) is set not to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is surprised, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) has a low probability of a special result (big hit) in a first game state (normal game state) and a probability of a special result (big hit) in the first game. It is possible to generate a second game state (time saving state or probability changing state) higher than the state. The game control means (game control device 100) gives predetermined information to the effect control device (effect control device 300) when the main variable display game starts when the sub variable display game that is a special result is changing. Can be sent. When the production control means (production control device 300) receives the same predetermined information (production adjustment command), the production control means is in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (time saving state or probability changing state). Perform different effect control.

  Therefore, appropriate performance control can be executed in both the first game state (normal game state) and the second game state (time saving state or probability variation state). Further, it is not necessary to provide two kinds of predetermined information (production adjustment command) corresponding to the first game state (normal game state) and the second game state (time saving state or probability variation state), and the control is simplified. Also, the cost can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the main variable display game in the first game state (normal game state) is not running waiting for customers, the sub variable display game is a special result (big hit). ), A predetermined display (right-handed instruction display, etc.) is displayed on the display device 41 in the first mode (inconspicuous mode, small mode, semi-transparent mode, etc.), and the second game state (time saving mode) Alternatively, when the sub variable display game has a special result (big hit) from the waiting for a customer in which the main variable display game is not executed in the probability variation state), the second mode (conspicuous mode, large mode, A predetermined display (right-handing instruction display, etc.) is displayed on the display device 41 in a non-transparent mode.

  Therefore, in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) where the probability of getting a special result (big hit) is low, it is easy to become unattended in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for customers, but waiting for customers in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) A predetermined display when a special result (big hit) is displayed in a mode different from the case where the special result (big hit) is obtained while waiting for a customer in the second gaming state (time saving state or probability variation state) By displaying in, it is possible to prevent an unrelated person from noticing a predetermined display and playing in an advantageous special game state.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the second mode (a conspicuous mode or a large mode) when the sub variable display game has a special result from the state in which the main variable display game is being executed. , A predetermined display (a right-handed instruction display, etc.) is displayed on the display device in a non-transparent mode. Therefore, when the sub variable display game has a special result while the main variable display game is not being waited for by the customer, the player is normally seated in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, according to the second mode. It is possible to display a predetermined display (right-handing instruction display, etc.) that is easy for the player to understand.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall / player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device 300. By the hall / player setting mode processing, a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of the hall (game shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B0401). When the hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When the hall setting mode is in effect (the result of B0401 is “Y”), the processing of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the operation of the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by the staff of the hall (game shop) or the like. Based on the, various settings and various adjustments are performed.

  If the hall setting mode is not in effect (result of B0401 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not player setting mode is in effect (B0402). When a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “Y”), the processes of B0420-B0425 are performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When the player setting mode is not in effect (result of B0402 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, in a predetermined situation where the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened, the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010), etc. In addition, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B0403 is “N”), the processing of B0417 is executed.

  The effect control device 300 draws a screen to start screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Start setting is performed (B0404). Then, the hole setting mode flag is set (B0405).

  Next, the production control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the production button 25 by a person in charge of the hall, the hall volume adjustment processing (B0406), the frame decoration device 18, or the board decoration. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B0408) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving for setting power saving. A setting process (B0409) is executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411). When an operation signal for the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When there is a setting confirming operation input (result of B0411 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed by the factory setting (B0412). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed at the factory shipment. When it is not confirmed by the setting at the time of factory shipment (the result of B0412 is “N”), the process proceeds to B0414. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is “Y”), the factory default setting process of performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various brightnesses determined in B0406-B0410 or B0413 is written in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B0414).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B0416).

  When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B0403 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. Note that waiting for customers is, for example, a state in which a video for customer waiting (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes the player setting selection process (B0420) for the player to set the parameter related to the notification in the effect of the game machine. In the player setting selection process, a setting selection screen (menu screen) as shown in FIG. 70 is displayed on the display device 41, and a selection screen (adjustment screen or the like) is displayed based on the item designated and selected by the player. Processing.

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the sound volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b as notification means capable of executing notification related to the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player on the selection screen. The adjustment process (B0421) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (B0422) for adjusting the brightness of the LED as the notification means capable of executing the notification regarding the effect in the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player on the selection screen (B0423). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (as an example, the “confirmation display area 715a” described in FIG. 71 and the like is selected) (B0424). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0424 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended. When the setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B0424 is “Y”), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0425). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0426). Note that the player setting data (or the player adjustment data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in B0421-B0422 may be erased and is not written in the backup memory.

  In the above description, the drawing update setting (such as updating highlight items in the menu display) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B0010).

[Example of setting selection screen by player]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display device 41 in association with the player setting selection process (B0420) in the player setting mode of the hall / player setting mode process according to the second embodiment. is there. In the screen example shown in FIG. 70, the decorative special symbol display “3, 4, 3” is displayed in the center of the display screen. In the variable display game, this symbol corresponds to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In the screen example, on the front side of the symbol display "3, 4, 3", in the central area of the display device 41, "model introduction 631", "volume / volume" for displaying items that can be set by the player Various item display areas such as "brightness adjustment 632", "real machine customization 633", "beginner's course 634", and "game log 635" are displayed in a menu format.

  In addition, in the screen example shown in FIG. 70, a holding decommissioning area 640 showing holding during digestion, a special figure 1 holding number display 650 for displaying the number of special figure 1 holdings, and a number of special figure 2 holdings are displayed. The special figure 2 hold number display 660 for this purpose, the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game are displayed.

  In the screen example of FIG. 70, each of the item display areas ("model introduction 631", "volume / luminance adjustment 632", "real machine customization 633", "beginner's course 634", "game log 635") is a symbol display It may be displayed so as to be superimposed on "3, 4, 3" or the like.

  In the setting selection screen (menu screen) shown in FIG. 70 described above, the player performs a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by moving the finger in the vertical direction (movement of the touched portion) to set items (settings). Items) can be designated in the order of "model introduction 631", "volume / luminance adjustment 632", "real machine customization 633", "beginner's course 634", and "gaming log 635". In addition, by continuing the touch operation, it is possible to specify the items in a loop.

  In FIG. 70, the touch operation specifies the volume or tone range (frequency region) that is a parameter related to the notification, or the setting of the brightness or the light amount of the LED (light emitting member), that is, the item “volume / brightness adjustment 632”. It has been shown that In FIG. 70, the designated item “volume / luminance adjustment 632” is displayed in a specific display mode with a thick frame. Here, as the specific display mode of the item designated by the touch operation, in addition to the highlighted display with a thick frame, for example, a highlighted display for brightly displaying the selected item, or an increase in the size of the selected item The display may be enlarged.

  In the present embodiment, the selection of the designated item can be confirmed by touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. That is, in the present embodiment, the display device 41 and the effect button 25 form a setting unit.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the player uses the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 to select "model introduction 631", "volume / luminance adjustment 632", "real machine customization 633", "beginner's course 634", From the "game log 635", desired items such as "volume / luminance adjustment 632" for adjusting parameters such as volume / luminance can be designated. For example, when “volume / brightness adjustment 632” is specified, the player setting selection process (B0420) causes a shift to the selection screen (adjustment screen) of FIG. 71. When "customized machine 633" is designated, a customization screen (not shown) is displayed by the player setting selection process (B0420). The item selected on the customization screen can be set by the effect customizing process (B0423).

  In the present embodiment, the central portion of the touch panel 25b is used as a confirmation button, but other buttons that function as confirmation buttons may be provided. As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 70, the LED 690 of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Each of the item display areas has a customer waiting demo displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize characters such as “model introduction” and “volume / brightness adjustment” indicating the content of the item. It is set to a color that is easy to distinguish from the effect. The color of the characters such as “model introduction” and “volume / brightness adjustment” indicating the content of the item is set to a target color tone with respect to the color tone set in the item display area.

  It is to be noted that the player setting mode screen example shown in FIG. 70 can be displayed because it is waiting for a customer, so that the variable display games are stopped in the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676. "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 660, and nothing is displayed in the reserved exhaustion area 640. It has not been.

[Example 1 of adjustment screen (for each volume / luminance)]
71 shows an example of an adjustment screen (selection screen) displayed when the item “volume / luminance adjustment 632” is selected in FIG. 70. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, a volume setting A (normal) gauge 711a for setting the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b as sound output means for outputting a sound, and a volume setting B. The gauge 711b of (high degree of expectation) is displayed. Further, a gauge 713a of LED luminance setting A (normal) for setting the luminance (and thus the amount of light) of the LED as the light emitting member and a gauge 713b of LED luminance setting B (high expectations) are displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, a parameter (notification parameter, effect parameter) of notification (notification effect) when the predetermined effect has a particular aspect with high (high) expectation or after the particular aspect has occurred. ) Can be set. Here, the parameter is the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, or the like.

  These gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative design (for example, the design display “3, 4, 3” described above).

  In the adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 71, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the setting values (parameter setting values) selected in the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b, and the previous display. (That is, the return display area 715b for selecting to return to the setting selection screen shown in FIG. 70) is displayed.

  Here, "normal" in the volume setting A and the LED brightness setting A means that the expectation level of the big hit of the effect being executed is in a normal state (a state where it is not large). The degree of expectation corresponds to the probability of a big hit when a certain effect is executed. The normal expectation may be, for example, an expectation of several percent or less.

  In the present embodiment, the volume setting A and the LED brightness setting A allow adjustment of parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) relating to notification sound, sound effect, BGM, LED lighting, etc., which are used in a normal expectation state. is there. Note that the notification sound, the sound effect, and the BGM may be collectively referred to as a notification sound. BGM is an abbreviation for background music, and a music piece that is played back along with an effect may be treated as BGM.

  In the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B, the “high expectation” means that the expectation of the big hit of the effect being performed is higher than usual, and is an example of the “high expectation” state. Indicates a state in which a so-called "red hold" as a red hold display has occurred. In the present embodiment, by adjusting the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B, the parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) related to the notification sound, the sound effect, the BGM, the LED lighting, etc. used in this “high expectation” state can be adjusted. It is possible.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the notification parameter can be set for the notification that is executed in association with the predetermined effect when the predetermined effect has a specific aspect. As an example, if the predetermined effect is a hold display effect or a hold change notice, the specific mode may be a display of red hold having a higher expectation than normal or a change to red hold, and the notification means is a speaker and the notification means. Is a reproduction (occurrence) of the hold generation sound and the hold change sound. In the present embodiment, the hold display effect is an effect of displaying the hold display (starting memory display) on the display device 41, and the hold change notice is an effect of changing and displaying the hold display mode. You may include the notice of pending change in the category of pending display effects.

  In addition, as the notification (notification effect) in which the parameter can be set in the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B, "the occurrence of the red hold" itself is notified when the red hold, which is larger than the expected degree, occurs. It may be the reproduction (occurrence) of the hold generation sound or the LED lighting, and a notification sound (notification sound, sound effect) that is performed irrespective of the "red reservation generation" after (after) the "red reservation generation". , BGM, etc.) or LED lighting.

  As shown in FIG. 71, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b is displayed with 10 level bars whose height increases from left to right, which correspond to the set values of the parameters. is doing. In FIG. 71, the level bar corresponding to the selected setting value is solidly displayed (in the actual machine, the inside of the bar is entirely lit).

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound, the sound effect, the notification sound such as BGM, etc. may change in volume as an effect during reproduction in a series of notification effects. Similarly, in the notification lighting of the LED or the like, the brightness and the light amount may change as effects during lighting in a series of notification effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “set value” of the volume that can be adjusted by the player indicates, for example, the amplification rate (gain) of the amplifier circuit 337 (see FIG. 4), and the basic volume in a series of notification effects. The level is set to “5”, for example. That is, when the "set value" is increased by 1, the basic volume level is increased by a predetermined ratio, and when the "set value" is decreased by 1, the basic volume level is decreased by the predetermined ratio.

  Similarly, in the setting of the notification effect such as the LED, the basic brightness level in the series of notification effects is set to, for example, "5", and when the "setting value" is increased by 1, the basic brightness level is set to a predetermined ratio. When the value is increased by one minute and the "set value" is decreased by one, the basic volume level is decreased by a predetermined ratio.

  In the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 71, the player performs a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by the movement of the finger in the vertical direction (movement of the touched portion) to sequentially turn the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b. Can be specified. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, each gauge can be specified in a loop.

  In addition, the player performs a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by the movement of the finger in the left and right directions, so as to correspond to the desired setting value of the parameter in the selected gauge (item) to be set. You can select the level bar. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the left and right directions, the level bar can be specified in a loop.

  In FIG. 71, the volume level A (normal) gauge 711a is set to the volume level 7 (seventh from the left side), and the volume setting B (high expectations) gauge 711b is set to the volume level 9 (seventh from the left side). ) Is set. Further, the LED brightness setting A (normal) gauge 713a is set to the brightness level 6 (sixth from the left side), and the LED brightness setting B (high expectations) is set to the brightness level 8 (8th from the left side). The state is set to.

  Further, FIG. 71 shows that the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high degree of expectation) is selected by the touch operation in the vertical direction. In FIG. 71, the selected gauge 711b is displayed in a specific display mode with a thick frame. Here, as the specific display mode of the item selected by the touch operation, in addition to highlighting with a thick frame, for example, highlighting for brightly displaying the selected item, or increasing the size of the selected item The display may be enlarged.

  In FIG. 71, the selection of the designated gauge 711b can be confirmed by selecting the confirmed display area 715a and touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. Similarly, the setting value of the level bar can be specified and confirmed by a touch operation in the left / right direction. Note that another button that functions as a confirm button may be provided. As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 71, the LED 690 portion of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Although an example in which the sound volume is set as a parameter with the gauge 711a (when the expectation is normal) and the gauge 711b (when the expectation is high) has been described above, the range (that is, the frequency range) may be set. . For example, if the "set value" is increased by 1, the range is expanded from the basic range by a predetermined ratio, and if the "set value" is decreased by 1, the range is reduced from the basic range by a predetermined ratio. To be done. In order to adjust the sound range, the amplifier circuit 337 of the effect control device 300 may be provided with the function of a bandpass filter.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the sound volume (tone range) of the notification sound, the sound effect, the BGM, and the like used in a state where the expectation of the big hit is normal, that is, the sound volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b. (Range) can be adjusted. In addition, it is possible to adjust the brightness (light amount) of the LEDs used in the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the like in a state where the degree of expectation is normal. Similarly, it is possible to adjust the volume (tone range) or the brightness (light amount) in a state where the expectation of the big hit is higher than usual, that is, in the state where the predetermined effect is in a specific mode where the expectation is high.

  Therefore, according to the second embodiment, when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode or in the subsequent (or later) expected situation, the notification parameters are set to other situations. Can be different from. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Even if the notification is performed in association with a predetermined effect (for example, a hold display effect or a hold change notice) (for example, a hold sound or a hold change sound is generated), the notification is a predetermined effect (for example, a hold display effect or a hold change notice). It may be one (for example, occurrence of BGM) that is executed in association with another effect (for example, reach effect) without being related.

  In the present embodiment, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, 713b is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the level bar, similar to the item display area described in FIG. The color is set to be easy to distinguish from the customer waiting demonstration. Further, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, 713b may be displayed semi-transparently so that the customer waiting demonstration effect or the decorative pattern display "3, 4, 3" which is the background can be seen.

  When the display device 41 is, for example, a normally white liquid crystal display, the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, 713b are set on a white background, and the area of each item display area with respect to the display screen of the display device 41 can be set. By setting as wide as possible, it is possible to save power consumption in the player setting mode.

  In the present embodiment, the settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the volume may be predetermined. For example, since the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B both originally set the parameters relating to the notification in the situation where the degree of expectation is high, the level range that can be set by the player is, for example, the reference level 5. The above may be limited to 6 to 10.

  Alternatively, the setting level of the volume setting B may be determined so that it cannot be set to a level lower than the setting level of the volume setting A. For example, when level 7 is selected in volume setting A, only any of levels 8 to 10 can be selected in volume setting B.

  The settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the LED brightness can be the same as in the case of setting the volume.

[Adjustment screen example 2 (for each volume and brightness (light intensity))]
FIG. 72 illustrates another example of the adjustment screen of the item “volume / luminance adjustment 632” in FIG. 70. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 72, the volume can be set for more detailed items. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the BGM volume and the dialogue volume are individually set as volume settings.

  In the example of the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72, a BGM volume setting A (normal) gauge 717a for setting the BGM volume and a BGM volume setting B (high expectations) gauge 717b are displayed. Further, a gauge 719a of dialogue volume setting A (normal) for setting dialogue volume and a gauge 719b of dialogue volume setting B (high expectation) are displayed.

  In addition to the volume adjusting gauge, an LED brightness setting gauge 721 for setting the brightness of the LED is also displayed.

  These gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721 may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative design (for example, the design display "3, 4, 3" described above).

  Also, in the adjustment screen, as in FIG. 71, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the setting values selected in the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b, and 721, and the previous display (that is, FIG. 70). A return display area 715b for selecting to return to the setting selection screen shown in FIG.

  Similarly to the display example of FIG. 71, also in FIG. 72, ten level bars whose height increases from left to right are displayed on the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721. , These correspond to the set values of the parameters.

  In the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72, the player sequentially specifies the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721 by performing a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by moving a finger in the up and down direction. You can Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, each gauge can be specified in a loop.

  In addition, the player performs a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by the movement of the finger in the left and right direction, so that the level bar corresponding to the desired setting value in the selected gauge (item) to be set. Can be selected. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the left and right directions, the level bar can be specified in a loop.

  In FIG. 72, the volume level 7 (7th from the left side) is set in the gauge 717a of the BGM volume setting A (normal), and the volume level 9 (from the left side) is set in the gauge 717b of the BGM volume setting B (high degree of expectation). 9th) is set. Further, the volume level 6 (sixth from the left side) is set on the gauge 719a of the speech volume setting A (normal), and the volume level 8 (eighth from the left side) is set on the gauge 719b of the speech volume setting B (high degree of expectation). The state is set to. Further, the LED brightness setting gauge 721 shows a state in which the brightness level is set to 6 (sixth from the left).

  Further, FIG. 72 shows that the gauge 717a of the BGM volume setting A (normal) is selected by the touch operation in the vertical direction. In FIG. 72, the selected gauge 717a is displayed in a specific display mode with a thick frame.

  In FIG. 72, the selection of the designated gauge 717a can be confirmed by touching the center portion of the touch panel 25b. Similarly, the setting value of the level bar can be specified and confirmed by a touch operation in the left / right direction. Note that another button that functions as a confirm button may be provided. As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 72, the LED 690 portion of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume (tone range) of the notification sound, the sound effect, the BGM, and the like used when the degree of expectation is normal, that is, the volume (tone range) of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b is It can be finely set for each type of notification contents such as dialogue and BGM. In addition, the brightness (light amount) of the LEDs used in the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the like in a state where the expectation is normal can be finely set for each type of notification content such as dialogue and BGM. Similarly, the volume (range) in a state where the expectation of the big hit is higher than usual, that is, in a state where the predetermined effect is in a specific mode where the expectation is high, can be finely set for each type of notification content. . Although not shown, the brightness (amount of light) can be finely set for each type of notification content (for example, the color of the LED or the place where the notification is provided).

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, among the parameters related to the notification related to the effect, the BGM and the dialogue volume are set, for example, with respect to the sound generated when the predetermined effect is in the specific mode or in the expected future situation. It can be set individually, independently, and unlike any other situation that cannot be expected. Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In FIG. 72, each of the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b, 721 is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the level bar, similar to the item display area described in FIG. It is set in a color that is easy to distinguish from the customer waiting demonstration production. Further, each of the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b, 721 may be displayed semi-transparently so that the customer waiting demonstration effect or the decorative pattern display "3, 4, 3" which is the background can be seen.

  In the present embodiment, the settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the volume may be predetermined. For example, since both the BGM volume setting B and the dialogue volume setting B originally set the parameter relating to the notification in the situation where the degree of expectation is high, the level range that can be set by the player is, for example, the reference level. You may be limited to 6-10 which is 5 or more.

  Alternatively, the setting level of the BGM volume setting B may be determined so that it cannot be set to a level lower than the setting level of the BGM volume setting A. For example, when level 7 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, only any of levels 8 to 10 can be selected in the BGM volume setting B. Alternatively, when the level 10 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, the BGM volume setting B can be fixed to the level 10.

  Further, for example, when the level 10 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, the display method of the gauge 717b is changed so that the level higher than the level 10 can be set in the BGM volume setting B. May be. For example, instead of reducing the width of the level bar, a total of 15 can be displayed.

  The settable range of the level bar in the gauge 721 for setting the LED brightness can be the same as in the case of setting the volume. Similarly, the LED brightness setting may be finely set for each type of notification content. For example, the LED may be individually set for each installation site in the game machine.

[Screen transition example 1]
FIG. 73 shows the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order when the notification is performed based on the volume / brightness (light intensity) adjustment screen example 1 described with reference to FIG. 71. It is an example of the screen transition diagram shown. That is, with regard to the volume, the volume level A (normal) gauge 711a is set to the volume level 7 (seventh from the left side), and the volume setting B (high degree of expectation) gauge 711b is set to the volume level 9 (from the left side 9). The second) is set. The LED brightness is set to the brightness level 6 (sixth from the left side) in the gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal), and the brightness level 8 (in the gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high expectation)). 8th from the left).

  In addition, in FIG. 73, an LED as a notification means arranged in the upper performance unit 40c (a part of the board decoration device 46) corresponding to a specific notification (here, a notification of a dialogue) that notifies the expectation degree of the big hit. Is emitted, and a notification sound is emitted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b as the notification means.

  FIG. 73A shows a display screen immediately before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal game state. In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “9, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in large size. Further, in the variable display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game) which is the subsidiary variable display game in the normal game state is variably displayed.

  Further, in (na), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the two-variation display game has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). On the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main change display game). Three (1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "3", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

  Subsequently, in (d) of FIG. 73, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game are both in the running state. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

  Further, in (d), each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the adjacent special figure 1 hold display 620a on the first display unit 620 (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold exhausting area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game before execution, whereas the special view of the hold exhausted area 640 is displayed. The 1 hold display 620a is a start memory display (a changing hold display) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game being executed.

  In (d), the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display section 620 is held and shifted from the first display section 620 to the hold exhaustion area 640, and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, Since the game ball has passed through the starting winning opening 36, a special figure 1 hold (first starting memory, special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game occurs. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is increased by one as a normal white hold display (normal hold display) (normal hold occurrence), and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is currently Toku-zu 1 The number of reservations "3" is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current number of special figure 2 reservations “4”.

  At this time, a notification sound "Queen" for notifying "normal hold occurrence" is issued as the hold occurrence sound at the volume level 7 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal) in FIG.

  Next, in (nu) of FIG. 73, on the display screen of the display device 41, a special jackpot 1 variation display game and a tokusatsu 2 variation display game are both in a running state, and an effect of notifying the expectation of a big hit is produced. As a result, the character 755 of the line "Chance!" Is displayed together with the tiger character 754 as a line notice. Further, in accordance with the character display effect, the dialogue sound of "chance!" Is notified as a dialogue notice at the volume level 7 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal) in FIG.

  Further, in (nu), the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c is lit for a predetermined period at the brightness level 6 set in the gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal). Here, the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c may emit light to notify that the character 754 and the character 755 of the line "Chance!" Are displayed (specific information), and the expectation of a big hit. Light may be emitted as a notification effect for notifying (specific information).

  Subsequently, in (N) of FIG. 73, while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both being executed, the game ball further passes through the starting winning opening 36, and the special figure 1 variable Special figure 1 suspension (first starting memory, special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the display game occurs. Then, the special map 1 hold display 620c corresponding to the special map 1 hold is increased by one as a hold display with a high expectation (red hold display) (so-called red hold occurs), and the special map 1 hold number display 650 shows the current feature. Fig. 1 Displays the number of reservations "4".

  At this time, a notification sound "Queen" for notifying "red holding occurrence" is issued as a holding occurrence sound at a large volume of the volume level 9 set in the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high degree of expectation) in FIG. . In this way, when the hold display effect as the predetermined effect becomes the display mode (specific mode) of the red color, the generation of the hold generation sound that is executed in association with the hold display effect (notification of occurrence of hold) With respect to the above, the volume of the hold sound (volume level 9) can be set to be different from the volume (volume level 7 (d)) in the normal display mode (white color display mode).

  Subsequently, in (N) of FIG. 73, on the display screen of the display device 41, “red hold occurrence” is notified while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both being executed. In addition to the effect, the character 755 of the line "Chance!" Is displayed as a notice of the line along with the tiger character 754. Also, in accordance with this character display effect, the dialogue sound of "Chance!" Is notified as a dialogue announcement at the volume level 9 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting B (high degree of expectation) in FIG.

  Further, in (No), the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c is turned on for a predetermined period at the brightness level 8 set in the gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high degree of expectation). Here, the LED arranged in the upper performance unit 40c may emit light to notify that the character 754 and the character 755 of the line "Chance!" Are displayed (specific information), or the red hold. The light may be emitted as part of the effect of notifying the occurrence (specific information).

  That is, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined effect (hold display effect) becomes a specific mode such as “red hold change”, the character and the dialogue effect are executed without being associated with the predetermined effect. Regarding the notification, the notification parameter (volume of the dialogue sound) can be set by the player.

  After that, in (c) of FIG. 73, the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) started in FIG. 73 (d) is stopped. As an example, the deviating symbol “7, 4, 3” corresponding to the deviating result (specific result) of the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 73C, the subsidiary variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is still running.

  Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 73, the number of holdings displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display 650 is the same as the holding number displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 holding number display 660. The special figure 2 variable display game is sequentially executed.

  According to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 73, when a predetermined effect (holding display effect, hold change notice effect) becomes a specific mode such as “red hold change”, it is associated with the predetermined effect. The parameters (volume, LED brightness) of the notification can be set for the notification (holding sound or LED emission) executed by the above. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the specific mode is notified based on the parameters (volume, LED brightness here) set by the player himself, the predetermined effect can be greatly excited, and the game can be played. The interest is enhanced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect) becomes a specific mode such as “red hold change”, the dialogue is executed independently of the predetermined effect. With regard to the notification and the notification of the light emission of the LED of the upper performance unit 40c, the notification parameters (here, the sound volume and the LED brightness) can be set by the player.

  As a result, in the present embodiment, for example, after a specific aspect such as "red hold change" or the like has been achieved, there is a great variety of effects even when performed without being associated with the "red hold change". The production can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example 3 of adjustment screen (notification setting corresponding to a specific effect)]
FIG. 74A is an example of an adjustment screen (selection screen) that allows the player to set the parameters relating to the notification corresponding to a predetermined effect. The adjustment screen may be a screen to be moved when the item “volume / luminance adjustment 632” or “actual device customization 633” on the setting selection screen (menu screen) of FIG. 70 is selected. In FIG. 74A, on the display screen of the display device 41, a gauge 722a for setting the volume up mode # 1 for increasing the volume at a predetermined effect, a gauge 722b for setting the volume up mode # 2, and an LED. A gauge 723 for setting the brightness up mode for increasing the brightness of is displayed. Further, a gauge 725 for setting a button vibration up mode that strengthens the vibration of the effect button 25 as a vibrating member, and a gauge for setting an air vibe up mode that strengthens the air vibration (vibration feeling due to intermittent blowing of air). 727 is displayed. These gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727 may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative design (for example, the design display "3, 4, 3" described above). The effect button 25 can be vibrated by a built-in vibrating mechanism. Air vibration can be generated by the air vibration mechanism provided on the operation handle 24.

  The volume up mode # 1 is a mode in which the volume of the notification sound, the sound effect, and the notification sound such as BGM used in the designated effect can be increased with a predetermined effect as an opportunity, and the player can increase the volume. It is possible to specify an effect that triggers (increase). On the gauge 722a, designated areas 731a and 731b for designating whether or not to activate the volume up mode # 1 (“on” / “off”), and “role action” as an opportunity to increase the volume, Designated areas 731c, 731d, 731e, 731f for designating "reach", "SP reach", "pseudo consecutive third time" and the like are displayed.

  Further, the volume up mode # 2 is a mode in which the volume of the notification sound, the sound effect, and the notification sound such as BGM applied in the designated effect can be increased in accordance with a predetermined effect stage, and the player can , It is possible to specify the effect of gradually increasing (increasing) the volume. On the gauge 722b, designated areas 733a and 733b for designating whether or not to activate the volume up mode # 2 (“on” / “off”), and as an effect of gradually increasing the volume, “hold change , "Chance eyes", "Step up", "Pseudo run", and the like are displayed as designated areas 733c, 733d, 733e, 733f. Details of the volume up mode # 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 74B.

  The brightness up mode is a mode in which the brightness (light amount) of the LED or the like applied in the specified effect can be increased, and the player can specify the effect that triggers the increase in the brightness (light amount). The gauges 723 have designated areas 735a and 735b for designating whether or not to activate the brightness up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold” and “reach” as opportunities for increasing the brightness. , Designation areas 735c, 735d, 735e, 735f for designating "SP reach", "pseudo consecutive third time" and the like are displayed.

  The button vibration up mode is a mode in which the vibration amount of the button vibration can be increased in the notification mode in which the effect button 25 applied in the specified effect is vibrated, and the player is an opportunity to increase the button vibration. Can be specified. The gauge 725 has designated areas 737a and 737b for designating whether or not to activate the button vibration up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold”, “reach” as an opportunity to strengthen the button vibration. , Designation areas 737c, 737d, 737e, 737f for designating "SP reach," "pseudo third time" and the like are displayed.

  The air vibe up mode is a mode in which the strength of the air vibe can be increased in the air vibe notification mode applied in the designated effect, and the player can specify the effect that triggers the air vibe to be increased. The gauges 727 have designated areas 739a and 739b for designating whether or not to activate the air vibe up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold”, “reach” as an opportunity to strengthen the air vibe. , Designation areas 739c, 739d, 739e, 739f for designating "SP reach", "pseudo consecutive third time", etc. are displayed.

  Note that the volume up mode # 1, the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibration up mode are not only during execution of an effect that triggers up, but also for various effects that are executed after the effect that triggers up. It is also possible to increase the parameters (volume, brightness (light amount) of LED, etc., vibration amount of button vibration, strength of air vibration) during execution.

  Further, in the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 74A, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the items designated in the gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727 and a selection for returning to the previous display. A return display area 715b is displayed.

  In FIG. 74A, the player designates the gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727 in order by performing a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by the movement of the finger in the vertical direction (movement of the touched portion). can do. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, each gauge can be specified in a loop. The designated gauge is displayed in a thick frame in FIG. 74A.

  Further, the player can specify an item to be set in the selected gauge by performing a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by moving the finger in the left-right direction. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the left-right direction, the items can be specified in a loop.

  In FIG. 74A, of the designated areas displayed on each of the gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727, the designated area shaded with diagonal lines indicates that the designated area is selected. For example, in the gauge 722a of the volume up mode # 1, the designated area 731a corresponding to "on" indicating that the volume up mode # 1 is activated is selected, and the designated area corresponding to "SP reach" as a trigger for volume up. It is shown that 731e is in the selected state.

  Further, in FIG. 74A, the gauge 722b is displayed in a specific display mode with a thick frame. This indicates that the gauge 722b is currently designated by the player. The player can specify a desired gauge and a designated area displayed in the gauge by performing a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by moving a finger in the up-down direction or the left-right direction.

  In addition, the player can confirm the selection of the designated gauge 711b by selecting the confirmed display area 715a and touching the center portion of the touch panel 25b. Note that another button that functions as a confirm button may be provided. As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 74A, the LED 690 portion of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  As the specific display mode of the gauge and the item selected by the touch operation, in addition to the highlighting with a thick frame, for example, a highlight display for brightly displaying the selected item, or a large size of the selected item It may be an enlarged display.

  In the volume up mode # 1 shown in FIG. 74A, for example, the volume level is increased from the reference level 5 to the reference level 10 described with reference to FIG. be able to. On the other hand, in Mode # 1 above, when any of the setting items is selected from the "feature action", the "reach", the "SP reach", and the "pseudo consecutive third time", the selected setting item is selected. Alternatively, the screen may be switched to a screen for displaying a gauge for setting parameters as shown in FIG. In the volume setting gauge, it is possible to change the set value by the level bar as described above.

  Further, in FIG. 74A, when it is possible to set a plurality of parameters and the parameters do not fit on the display screen, a plurality of setting screens may be prepared for parameter setting so that the parameters can be switched. It can also be a scroll screen. In this case, the player operates the scroll bar displayed in the frame portion of the scroll screen to sequentially display the items not displayed on the display screen within the range of the display screen. This can increase the settable items.

  Next, the volume up mode # 2 will be described in detail. FIG. 74B specifically describes the effect of gradually increasing the volume in volume up mode # 2. FIG. 74B (a) is a diagram for explaining the volume setting of "hold change" designated in the instruction area 733c. Special Figure 1 Fluctuating display The pending display of each hold corresponding to the execution right of the game includes white hold (normal hold, white hold display), blue hold (blue) in the order of small to large expectations (low to high). Hold display), red hold (red hold display), and hold change notice effects that change the display mode (here, color) are set. In the present embodiment, during the white hold, which is the first stage of the hold display, the hold change sound for notifying the hold change (hold occurrence) is announced at the volume “low”, and when the second stage is the blue hold, The hold change sound is notified at the volume "medium", and the hold change sound is notified at the volume "high" at the third stage of red hold. The hold display, which was white hold at the time of occurrence, may be gradually changed to blue hold and further red hold depending on the expectation level of the big hit of hold. Alternatively, the hold display, which was held in blue at the time of occurrence, may be changed to red, depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit on hold.

  FIG. 74B (b) is a diagram illustrating the volume setting of the “chance eye” designated in the instruction area 733d. In the present embodiment, the “eye of chance” represents an opportunity read-ahead effect. The chance eye prefetching effect means that when the stop result mode of the decorative special map variable display game does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode), the stop result mode is set as a specific stop result mode, so that the prefetch (predetermination ) Is an effect for notifying the result of the determination of holding the target (or the degree of expectation of a big hit). The chance eye look-ahead effect is executed as a continuous notice effect over a plurality of decorative special figure variation display games.

  The number of continuations of the chance eye look-ahead production is set to be 1 → 2 → 3 times in the order of small to large expectation → large (low → high). In the present embodiment, the chance eye stop sound is notified with the volume “low” when the number of times of the chance eye look-ahead production is once, and the chance eye stop sound is notified with the volume “medium” when the number of times of continuation of the chance eye look-ahead effect is once. The third stop sound is announced with the volume "high" at the third time.

  FIG. 74B (c) is a diagram for explaining the volume setting of “step up” designated in the instruction area 733e. In the present embodiment, “step-up” indicates a step-up notice. The step-up notice is an effect in which single effects (sub-effects) set in a plurality of stages are sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

  The number of times the step-up notice is executed is set to be small, large, and high (low, high) in the order of 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times. In the present embodiment, when the number of times the step-up notice is executed is once (first stage), the sound effect is notified with the volume "small", and when it is twice (second stage), the effect is sound with the volume "medium". The sound is notified, and the sound effect is notified with the volume “loud” at the third time (third stage).

  FIG. 74B (d) is a diagram for explaining the volume setting of “pseudo-relation” designated in the instruction area 733f. In the present embodiment, “pseudo-relation” represents a pseudo continuous effect. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated and temporarily stopped for a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game.

  The number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (the number of pseudo repetitions) is set to 2 times → 3 times → 4 times in the order of small expectation → large (low → high). In the present embodiment, when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is two, the sound effect is notified at the volume “low”, when the sound is three times, the sound effect is notified at the volume “medium”, and when the number of executions is four. The sound effect is announced at the volume "high".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can perform predetermined effects in the predetermined effects that can be executed in stages (holding change notice effect, chance look-ahead effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.). It is possible to set a parameter (volume) relating to notification (hold change sound, chance stop sound, effect sound generation) at each stage or each execution count.

  In the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibration mode, as in the volume up mode # 1, the notification is executed according to a predetermined notification pattern associated with a predetermined effect.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the player is able to execute the predetermined effects such as the pending change notice effect, the reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the accessory action effect in stages, the predetermined effect is, for example, It is possible to set parameters relating to notification when a predetermined stage such as red hold, SP reach, pseudo continuous n times (the number of times of pseudo continuous effect execution is n times), and accessory operation is reached.

  Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect such as a hold change notice executed based on the determination result of the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) executed in the game control device 100 becomes a specific mode (for example, red hold) or thereafter. In the expected situation, the notification parameter can be changed from that before. For example, when the parameter is the volume, it is possible to set the volume to be high when the determination result of the pre-determination means is good, and to keep the volume low before that or when the determination result is bad.

  Therefore, it is possible to greatly enliven the effect when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced. On the other hand, in the stage before becoming the specific mode, the volume and the like can be set low and the LED brightness can be set low, so that the noise in the game hall can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, for example, if the hold change instruction area 733c is selected, based on the volume output pattern table shown in FIG. 74B (a), a notification effect of notifying a hold change (generation of a hold change sound) The volume of (effect) is preset for each hold display mode (each stage of hold change). On the other hand, the setting value of each volume shown in FIG. 74B may be adjusted to a value desired by the player. The same applies to the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibration mode.

[Screen transition example 2]
FIG. 75 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series. In FIG. 75, the notification effect using the volume / luminance set based on the example of the adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 74A and 74B is executed. In the effect shown in FIG. 75, an LED (notification means) as a light emitting member arranged in the upper effect unit 40c emits light, and an upper speaker 19a and a lower speaker as sound output means (notification means) capable of generating sound. A notification sound is emitted from 19b.

  In FIG. 75 (m), the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game), which is the main variable display game, is being executed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41, and is at the right end of the display screen. In the variable display area 615 of the set, a special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game) which is a subsidiary variable display game in the normal game state is variably displayed. In the state where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are variably displayed, the upper effect unit 40c is weakly lit with a small luminance (small reference level).

  Further, in (m), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is changing, The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the two-variation display game has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). On the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main change display game). Two (1 start memory display) are displayed. In addition, since the special figure 1 variable display game is changing (being used), the symbol “◯” is displayed in the pending use area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "2", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

  Next, in (M) of FIG. 75, when the game ball has passed through the starting winning opening 36 in a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are variably displayed, the special figure 1 variation The special figure 1 hold display 620a, which is the right to execute the display game, is increased by one as a blue hold display (blue hold occurs), and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of the special figure 1 hold “3”. To do. At this time, the notification sound "Queen" for notifying "blue hold occurrence" as the hold change sound or the hold occurrence sound is the volume "medium" of the "hold change sound" set in the volume up mode # 2 selected in FIG. 74A. ] (Fig. 74B (a)). During this time, the upper effect unit 40c is lit at a low brightness (reference level).

  In (m) of FIG. 73, a predetermined time has elapsed from (m) of FIG. 75, but while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both variably displayed, FIG. It is shown that the “blue hold” generated in (i) has changed to “red hold”. That is, the notice of change of the hold as the predetermined effect is the red hold as a specific mode.

  At this time, since the special figure 1 hold display 620a has changed to red hold, the notification sound "Queen" for notifying "red hold occurrence" is set as the hold change sound to the volume up mode # 2 selected in FIG. 74A. The volume of the “holding change sound” is “high” (FIG. 74B (a)). In addition, at this time, the upper effect unit 40c starts strong lighting with the luminance of “red hold”, which is the trigger for the up when the luminance up mode selected in FIG. 74A is set, that is, the luminance (high luminance) higher than the reference level. To do.

  Subsequently, in (m) of FIG. 75, in the central portion of the variable display area 610, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in a temporary stop mode of “reach”, and “reach” is notified on the display screen of the display device 41. The location is displayed. At this time, the BGM for notifying the "reach" is started at the volume "low" (reference level). In addition, the LED of the upper effect unit 40c continues to be lit at a high brightness (high brightness level) not only when the red hold is displayed but also while the red hold is displayed. That is, the LED continues to be lit with the large brightness (high brightness) set in the brightness up mode even after the hold change notice as the predetermined effect has become the specific mode (red hold).

  Subsequently, in (mo) of FIG. 75, the form (“SP reach”) in which the form of “reach” is changed (developed) and the movie display area 740 for displaying a movie appears as a predetermined effect is displayed. ing. At this time, the volume of BGM for notifying the "reach" is notified at the volume "high" set in the volume up mode # 1 selected in FIG. 74A. During this period, the upper effect unit 40c is lit at a high brightness (high brightness level).

  After that, in (a) of FIG. 73, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. As an example, the outlier symbol “3, 4, 3” corresponding to the outlier result (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the center of the display screen. Note that in (a), the special figure 2 variable display game remains in the running state.

  Although not shown in FIG. 75, the number of holdings displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display 650 and the number of holdings displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display 660 are changed thereafter. The special figure 2 variable display game is sequentially executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 75, the predetermined effect (hold change effect) for changing the display mode (color) of the hold display is “white hold” → “blue hold”. According to the change of the mode such as “change” → “red hold change”, the specific mode such as “red hold change” is finally obtained. At this time, with respect to the notification (holding change sound or LED emission) executed in association with the predetermined effect, the notification parameters (volume, LED brightness) can be set. Further, for example, when the reach effect as the predetermined effect has evolved from the normal “reach” (N reach) to “SP reach” (specific mode, new stage), notification of “reach” (here, BGM Similarly, for playback, it is possible to set the volume up.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the mode of notification changes stepwise according to the increase in the degree of expectation based on the parameters (volume, LED brightness here) set by the player himself, so the predetermined The production can be greatly enlivened, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 74A, in the volume increasing modes # 1 and # 2, "accessory action", "reach", "SP reach", "pseudo consecutive third time", "hold change", "chance eye", " “Step-up”, “pseudo-run”, etc. are not limited to these. It is also possible to set the BGM and LED brightness to be increased stepwise. In addition, in FIG. 74A, the case where the increase of the volume and the brightness can be selected has been described, but conversely, the configuration may be such that the decrease (decrease) of the volume and the brightness is set.

  Further, in FIG. 74A, in the volume up mode # 1, “effect action” is set as one of the triggers for the increase, but it is also possible to set the sound effect during the action of the effect to be increased stepwise. Good. Similarly, the notification sound at the start of "the third consecutive pseudo" may be set to be gradually increased. Similarly, the sound effects and BGM applied after the development of "SP reach" may be set to be gradually increased.

  Although the second embodiment has been described above, the notification parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) can be set not only by the player in the player setting mode of the hall / player setting mode process, but also in the hall setting. In the mode, it may be set by a person related to the hall (game hall) such as an attendant or a manager (B0406, B0407, B0408). In the hall setting mode, the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display or the like) of the display device 41 may be set as a notification parameter (B0408). In addition, an example has been described in which an item or the like on the display screen of the display device 41 is selected by operating the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25. However, when the gaming machine 10 includes a cross-shaped so-called cross key, the cross key is used. Items and the like may be selected by the operation of.

  Moreover, you may apply 2nd Embodiment to the setting suggestion production (B2012) which suggests a setting value (probability setting value, setting). For example, the notification parameters (volume of the speaker and brightness of the LED) related to the setting suggestion effect on the screen of the display device 41 may be set on the adjustment screens of FIGS. 71 and 72. In this case, the high expected degree (high expected degree) in FIGS. 71 and 72 may be replaced with the high probability set value (high setting). For example, the red hold occurrence with the high expected degree in FIG. 73 is increased. It may be replaced with the setting suggestion effect of the setting. Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect may be added as an opportunity to increase the parameters (volume, brightness, button vibration, and air vibration intensity) in FIG. 74A, and the parameters may be increased when the setting suggestion effect is executed.

  In step B2012 of FIG. 55 (fluctuation effect setting process), the content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by lottery, but the staff of the hall or the like sets the lottery table used for this lottery in the hall setting mode (FIG. 69). May be set in. For example, one of the lottery table A and the lottery table B (default table) having a high appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect for all (or specific) set values may be set in the hall setting mode. In the hall setting mode, when the staff of the hall or the like selects the ON item related to the setting suggestion effect on the display screen by operating the effect button 25, the lottery table A is set, and when the OFF item is selected, the lottery table B is set. You can By setting the lottery table A in which the appearance rate of the setting suggestion production is high, the number of customers in the hall is improved. Note that the lottery table B (default table) may be returned when the power is turned on after the power failure of the gaming machine 10 (after the power is turned off). As a result, the lottery table A only needs to be set in the hall setting mode only on a specific day when it is desired to increase the number of customers.

  Also, in the adjustment screens of FIGS. 71 and 72, the notification parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) are set separately for the state in which the effect with the normal expectation is executed and the state in which the effect with the high expectation is executed. Further, the notification parameter may be set more finely for each state in which each effect is executed.

[Operation / Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is capable of performing notification (upper speaker 10a and lower speaker) that is capable of executing notifications related to performance (changed sound, sound effect, sound such as BGM, or light generation such as LED). The speaker 10b, the LED of the frame decoration device 18, the LED of the board decoration device 46) and the operation means (effect button 25) are operated to set the parameter (volume, LED brightness, etc.) relating to the notification. Effect control device 300 and effect button 25), the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25), the predetermined effect (holding display effect, pending change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory operation. When the performance (production, setting suggestion, etc.) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo nth time, character action, setting suggestion mode of high setting, etc.) Data is a possible setting.

  Therefore, the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character action operation effect, etc.) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo nth time, character operation, etc.). In a situation that can be expected at the time of playing or after becoming a specific mode, the parameter of the notification related to the performance becomes different from other situations that cannot be expected. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the setting means may be able to set parameters when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode or thereafter, according to the content of the notification (FIG. 72). As a result, the parameters (volume, LED brightness, etc.) can be increased or decreased according to the content of the notification, so that a wide variety of effects can be executed and the enjoyment of the game is improved. For example, the content of the notification is BGM, serif, or the like in the case of notification by voice from a speaker, and in the case of notification by the light emission of the LED, the emission color or the location of the LED that emits light.

  In the second embodiment, the setting means may be able to set, for each predetermined effect, whether or not to change the parameter when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode or after that (on / off of the up mode) (FIG. 74A). ). For example, the volume up mode and the brightness up mode are set for each of the pending change notice effect, the accessory action effect, the SP reach effect, and the pseudo continuous effect. As a result, a variety of effects can be executed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can execute an effect related to the game (variable display game), and when the game result is a special result (big hit), a special game state advantageous to the player is set. It can occur. The setting means can set parameters according to the degree of expectation that a special result (big hit) will occur when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode (FIG. 74B). As a result, for example, as the degree of expectation is higher, the parameter (volume, LED brightness, etc.) can be increased to enliven the effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  In the second embodiment, predetermined effects (holding change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, effect operation effect, etc.) can be executed step by step, and the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) can be used. It is possible to set parameters when a predetermined effect (holding change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory motion effect, etc.) reaches a predetermined stage. As a result, in a predetermined effect that can be executed stepwise, such as a pending change notice or a pseudo continuous effect, in a situation that can be expected when the predetermined effect reaches a predetermined stage, the parameter of the notification related to the effect cannot be expected. The situation will be different. In addition, a notification parameter (volume, LED brightness, etc.) can be set for each stage, and the expectation of a big hit that increases as the stage increases can be reported by changing the parameter. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) has a specific effect (preferred effect, pending change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory motion effect, etc.) in a specific mode ( Red suspension, SP reach, pseudo n-th time, accessory operation, etc.) (for example, suspension in the case where a specific aspect of the predetermined production is red suspension) It is possible to set parameters (volume, etc.) with respect to generated sound, hold change sound, etc.). Thereby, when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode, the parameter of the notification executed in association with the predetermined effect can be set, so that the predetermined effect can be greatly excited.

  In the second embodiment, the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) has a specific effect (preferred effect, pending change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory motion effect, etc.) in a specific mode ( After the red hold, the SP reach, the pseudo nth time, the character action, etc.), a notification that is executed without being related to the predetermined effect (for example, when a specific mode of the predetermined effect is red hold) Parameters can be set for the BGM of the movie after the red-holding change). As a result, after the predetermined effect has become a specific mode, it is possible to set notification parameters that are executed without being associated with the predetermined effect, so that a variety of effects can be executed and the player's expectations are fueled. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, a control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed, and a start storage unit (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute the variable display game. ) And a preliminary determination means (game control) capable of determining the result of the variable display game regarding the starting memory before the variable display game based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means (game control device 100) is executed. The device 100 includes a pre-reading process and a pre-determination process), and a notice production unit (production control device 300) that executes a predetermined production (preliminary change notice) based on the determination result of the pre-determination unit.

  As a result, when the predetermined effect (preliminary change notice, etc.) executed based on the determination result of the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) executed in the game control device 100 becomes a specific mode or becomes a specific mode. In the expected situation thereafter, the notification parameter can be changed from that before that. For example, if the parameter is the volume, it is possible to reduce the noise in the amusement hall by increasing the volume when the determination result of the prefetching process is good and keeping the volume low before that or when the determination result is bad. .

  In the second embodiment, the notification means is sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) capable of generating sound, and the parameter is the volume or range (range) of the sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b). Frequency domain). In this way, since the parameter relating to the notification is the volume or the range, the predetermined effect (holding display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character action effect effect, etc.) is in a specific mode (red hold, SP reach). , N-th pseudo-repetition, the operation of the accessory, etc.) can be set to a low volume or a middle tone range, and can be set to a high volume or a high tone range (low tone range) only when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode. Therefore, noise in the game arcade can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the notification means is a light emitting member (LED of the frame decoration device 18, LED of the board decoration device 46) capable of emitting light, and the parameter can be the brightness or the light amount of the light emitting member (LED). . In this way, since the notification parameter is the brightness or the light amount of the light emitting member (LED), the predetermined effect (holding display effect, pending change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory motion effect, etc.) is a specific mode. It is possible to set a low brightness or a light amount until (red hold, SP reach, nth consecutive pseudo action, character work, etc.) and a high brightness or a light amount only when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode. Therefore, the eyestrain of the player can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the notification means is a vibrating member (effect button 25, vibrating mechanism, air vibrating mechanism) capable of vibrating, and the parameter is the magnitude of vibration of the vibrating member (effect button 25, vibrating mechanism, air vibrating mechanism). can do. In this way, since the notification parameter is the magnitude of the vibration of the vibrating member (effect button 25, vibrating mechanism, air vibrating mechanism), a predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, role It is possible to make a weak vibration until a specific action (such as a product action effect) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo n-th time, character action, etc.) and to make a strong vibration only when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make the notification effect sharp and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 25 Production Button 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 36 First Starting Winning Port (First Starting Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 game control device (main board)
152 Performance display device 200 Discharge control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can perform production,
An informing means capable of executing an information related to the effect,
By operating the operating means, setting means capable of setting the parameter relating to the notification,
Equipped with
The setting means,
A game machine characterized in that the parameter can be set when or when a predetermined effect is in a specific mode.